US20080003620A1 - Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase - Google Patents
Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20080003620A1 US20080003620A1 US11/608,788 US60878806A US2008003620A1 US 20080003620 A1 US20080003620 A1 US 20080003620A1 US 60878806 A US60878806 A US 60878806A US 2008003620 A1 US2008003620 A1 US 2008003620A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- compounds
- peptide
- ar02e8
- compound
- ige
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 title claims abstract description 391
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 153
- 108010076278 Adenosine kinase Proteins 0.000 title claims abstract description 152
- 102100032534 Adenosine kinase Human genes 0.000 title claims abstract description 152
- OOXNYFKPOPJIOT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(3-bromophenyl)-7-(6-morpholin-4-ylpyridin-3-yl)pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-amine;dihydrochloride Chemical compound Cl.Cl.C=12C(N)=NC=NC2=NC(C=2C=NC(=CC=2)N2CCOCC2)=CC=1C1=CC=CC(Br)=C1 OOXNYFKPOPJIOT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 title claims abstract description 133
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 37
- 102000010787 Interleukin-4 Receptors Human genes 0.000 title claims abstract description 24
- 108010038486 Interleukin-4 Receptors Proteins 0.000 title claims abstract description 24
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 title description 19
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 title description 17
- 102000004388 Interleukin-4 Human genes 0.000 claims abstract description 109
- 108090000978 Interleukin-4 Proteins 0.000 claims abstract description 109
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 91
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 17
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 abstract description 13
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 abstract description 4
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 240
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 126
- 229940028885 interleukin-4 Drugs 0.000 description 107
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical group 0.000 description 99
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 98
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 98
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 description 67
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 description 67
- 210000004602 germ cell Anatomy 0.000 description 63
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 61
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 56
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 54
- -1 peptide AR02E8wt Chemical compound 0.000 description 49
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 48
- 206010020751 Hypersensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 43
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 35
- 210000003719 b-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 35
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 35
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 33
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 32
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 31
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 30
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 30
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 29
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 29
- OIRDTQYFTABQOQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N adenosine Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O OIRDTQYFTABQOQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 27
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 24
- 238000001086 yeast two-hybrid system Methods 0.000 description 24
- 108060003951 Immunoglobulin Proteins 0.000 description 22
- 102000018358 immunoglobulin Human genes 0.000 description 22
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 21
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 21
- 206010012438 Dermatitis atopic Diseases 0.000 description 20
- 108010029485 Protein Isoforms Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 102000001708 Protein Isoforms Human genes 0.000 description 20
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 20
- 201000008937 atopic dermatitis Diseases 0.000 description 20
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 20
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 20
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 19
- 108091005948 blue fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 18
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 18
- DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycine Chemical compound NCC(O)=O DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 17
- 208000026935 allergic disease Diseases 0.000 description 17
- 230000007815 allergy Effects 0.000 description 17
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 17
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 17
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 17
- 125000003710 aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 16
- XUJNEKJLAYXESH-REOHCLBHSA-N L-Cysteine Chemical compound SC[C@H](N)C(O)=O XUJNEKJLAYXESH-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 229940072221 immunoglobulins Drugs 0.000 description 15
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 101000796941 Homo sapiens Adenosine kinase Proteins 0.000 description 14
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N L-alanine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)C(O)=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 229960005305 adenosine Drugs 0.000 description 14
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 14
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 14
- 239000002126 C01EB10 - Adenosine Substances 0.000 description 13
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 13
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 13
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 13
- 208000010668 atopic eczema Diseases 0.000 description 13
- 125000004446 heteroarylalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 13
- 230000019491 signal transduction Effects 0.000 description 13
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 13
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 238000002965 ELISA Methods 0.000 description 12
- 108010043121 Green Fluorescent Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 12
- 102000004144 Green Fluorescent Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 12
- 239000005090 green fluorescent protein Substances 0.000 description 12
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 12
- 230000009610 hypersensitivity Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 12
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 description 12
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 description 12
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 description 12
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- 230000002052 anaphylactic effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 208000006673 asthma Diseases 0.000 description 11
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 11
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 11
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 11
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 11
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 11
- 108091026890 Coding region Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 108010069514 Cyclic Peptides Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 102000001189 Cyclic Peptides Human genes 0.000 description 10
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 10
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-VKHMYHEASA-N L-glutamine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 10
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 10
- 108010005774 beta-Galactosidase Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 10
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 10
- 208000024711 extrinsic asthma Diseases 0.000 description 10
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 description 10
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 description 10
- 230000001177 retroviral effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 10
- 208000003950 B-cell lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 206010010744 Conjunctivitis allergic Diseases 0.000 description 9
- SIKJAQJRHWYJAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Indole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC=CC2=C1 SIKJAQJRHWYJAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 208000009388 Job Syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 9
- WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-VKHMYHEASA-N L-glutamic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC(O)=O WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 9
- KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-valine Chemical compound CC(C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 9
- 206010039085 Rhinitis allergic Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 201000008736 Systemic mastocytosis Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 239000004098 Tetracycline Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 208000002205 allergic conjunctivitis Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 201000010105 allergic rhinitis Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 125000000539 amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 208000024998 atopic conjunctivitis Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 102000005936 beta-Galactosidase Human genes 0.000 description 9
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 9
- 239000013604 expression vector Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 9
- 206010051040 hyper-IgE syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 238000007423 screening assay Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229960002180 tetracycline Drugs 0.000 description 9
- 229930101283 tetracycline Natural products 0.000 description 9
- 235000019364 tetracycline Nutrition 0.000 description 9
- 150000003522 tetracyclines Chemical class 0.000 description 9
- 238000001890 transfection Methods 0.000 description 9
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N (2S)-2-Amino-3-hydroxypropansäure Chemical compound OC[C@H](N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 208000012657 Atopic disease Diseases 0.000 description 8
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 8
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-lysine Chemical compound NCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 8
- AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-GBXIJSLDSA-N L-threonine Chemical compound C[C@@H](O)[C@H](N)C(O)=O AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-GBXIJSLDSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 206010060880 Monoclonal gammopathy Diseases 0.000 description 8
- 108700008625 Reporter Genes Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 102000004887 Transforming Growth Factor beta Human genes 0.000 description 8
- 108090001012 Transforming Growth Factor beta Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 238000010171 animal model Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 8
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000000159 protein binding assay Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- ZRKFYGHZFMAOKI-QMGMOQQFSA-N tgfbeta Chemical compound C([C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCNC(N)=N)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H]([C@@H](C)O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H]([C@@H](C)O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCSC)C(C)C)[C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(O)=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 ZRKFYGHZFMAOKI-QMGMOQQFSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 125000001313 C5-C10 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical group [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 102000016607 Diphtheria Toxin Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 108010053187 Diphtheria Toxin Proteins 0.000 description 7
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N L-aspartic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 210000001744 T-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000005557 antagonist Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 7
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 7
- 238000002825 functional assay Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000001415 gene therapy Methods 0.000 description 7
- 101150026046 iga gene Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 210000000987 immune system Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 7
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000000069 prophylactic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 7
- FSYKKLYZXJSNPZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N sarcosine Chemical compound C[NH2+]CC([O-])=O FSYKKLYZXJSNPZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 239000011550 stock solution Substances 0.000 description 7
- 241000701161 unidentified adenovirus Species 0.000 description 7
- 239000013603 viral vector Substances 0.000 description 7
- SGKRLCUYIXIAHR-AKNGSSGZSA-N (4s,4ar,5s,5ar,6r,12ar)-4-(dimethylamino)-1,5,10,11,12a-pentahydroxy-6-methyl-3,12-dioxo-4a,5,5a,6-tetrahydro-4h-tetracene-2-carboxamide Chemical compound C1=CC=C2[C@H](C)[C@@H]([C@H](O)[C@@H]3[C@](C(O)=C(C(N)=O)C(=O)[C@H]3N(C)C)(O)C3=O)C3=C(O)C2=C1O SGKRLCUYIXIAHR-AKNGSSGZSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 125000004169 (C1-C6) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- YBYIRNPNPLQARY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-indene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CC=CC2=C1 YBYIRNPNPLQARY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 6
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-arginine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCN=C(N)N ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 6
- DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-REOHCLBHSA-N L-asparagine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(N)=O DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 6
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-tyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 6
- KSPIYJQBLVDRRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methylisoleucine Chemical compound CCC(C)C(NC)C(O)=O KSPIYJQBLVDRRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108091005804 Peptidases Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 239000004365 Protease Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229960003767 alanine Drugs 0.000 description 6
- XSCHRSMBECNVNS-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzopyrazine Natural products N1=CC=NC2=CC=CC=C21 XSCHRSMBECNVNS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 230000004071 biological effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000011203 carbon fibre reinforced carbon Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012875 competitive assay Methods 0.000 description 6
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000010790 dilution Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000012895 dilution Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229960003722 doxycycline Drugs 0.000 description 6
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229940088598 enzyme Drugs 0.000 description 6
- GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoranthene Chemical group C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=C22)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 6
- RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazole Natural products C1=CNC=N1 RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- PQNFLJBBNBOBRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indane Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCCC2=C1 PQNFLJBBNBOBRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 210000004698 lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000003981 vehicle Substances 0.000 description 6
- FUOOLUPWFVMBKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Aminoisobutyric acid Chemical compound CC(C)(N)C(O)=O FUOOLUPWFVMBKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 125000000172 C5-C10 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-UWTATZPHSA-N D-alanine Chemical compound C[C@@H](N)C(O)=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-UWTATZPHSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 241000701044 Human gammaherpesvirus 4 Species 0.000 description 5
- FFEARJCKVFRZRR-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-methionine Chemical compound CSCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O FFEARJCKVFRZRR-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 5
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lysine Natural products NCCCCC(N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 102000035195 Peptidases Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 239000000556 agonist Substances 0.000 description 5
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 230000001186 cumulative effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000001943 fluorescence-activated cell sorting Methods 0.000 description 5
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 230000028993 immune response Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 5
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 5
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 239000002777 nucleoside Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000002953 phosphate buffered saline Substances 0.000 description 5
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000003826 tablet Substances 0.000 description 5
- 125000003903 2-propenyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 4
- KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7H-purine Chemical compound N1=CNC2=NC=NC2=C1 KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-carbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon dioxide Chemical compound O=C=O CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 102000004127 Cytokines Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 108090000695 Cytokines Proteins 0.000 description 4
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-alpha-Ala Natural products CC([NH3+])C([O-])=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000012286 ELISA Assay Methods 0.000 description 4
- YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Furan Chemical compound C=1C=COC=1 YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 4
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108010074328 Interferon-gamma Proteins 0.000 description 4
- ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-Proline Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H]1CCCN1 ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 4
- HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-histidine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CN=CN1 HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 4
- AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-WHFBIAKZSA-N L-isoleucine Chemical compound CC[C@H](C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-WHFBIAKZSA-N 0.000 description 4
- ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-leucine Chemical compound CC(C)C[C@H](N)C(O)=O ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 4
- LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-norleucine Chemical compound CCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 4
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 241001529936 Murinae Species 0.000 description 4
- AKCRVYNORCOYQT-YFKPBYRVSA-N N-methyl-L-valine Chemical compound CN[C@@H](C(C)C)C(O)=O AKCRVYNORCOYQT-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 4
- UFWIBTONFRDIAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Naphthalene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 UFWIBTONFRDIAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenazine Natural products C1=CC=CC2=NC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108010076504 Protein Sorting Signals Proteins 0.000 description 4
- KYQCOXFCLRTKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazine Chemical compound C1=CN=CC=N1 KYQCOXFCLRTKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrrole Chemical compound C=1C=CNC=1 KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinoline Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108010090804 Streptavidin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophene Chemical compound C=1C=CSC=1 YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108091023040 Transcription factor Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102000040945 Transcription factor Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001042 affinity chromatography Methods 0.000 description 4
- 235000004279 alanine Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- MWPLVEDNUUSJAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N anthracene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C21 MWPLVEDNUUSJAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- CUFNKYGDVFVPHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N azulene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC=CC2=C1 CUFNKYGDVFVPHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 4
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 4
- WDECIBYCCFPHNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N chrysene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C=CC3=C21 WDECIBYCCFPHNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000010367 cloning Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 4
- VPUGDVKSAQVFFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N coronene Chemical group C1=C(C2=C34)C=CC3=CC=C(C=C3)C4=C4C3=CC=C(C=C3)C4=C2C3=C1 VPUGDVKSAQVFFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 4
- 235000019441 ethanol Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 4
- JYGXADMDTFJGBT-VWUMJDOOSA-N hydrocortisone Chemical compound O=C1CC[C@]2(C)[C@H]3[C@@H](O)C[C@](C)([C@@](CC4)(O)C(=O)CO)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 JYGXADMDTFJGBT-VWUMJDOOSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 4
- AWJUIBRHMBBTKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoquinoline Chemical compound C1=NC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 AWJUIBRHMBBTKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229940124280 l-arginine Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 4
- YNPNZTXNASCQKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenanthrene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 YNPNZTXNASCQKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- RDOWQLZANAYVLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenanthridine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=NC2=C1 RDOWQLZANAYVLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- GBROPGWFBFCKAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N picene Chemical group C1=CC2=C3C=CC=CC3=CC=C2C2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1C=C2 GBROPGWFBFCKAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C=CC3=CC=CC4=CC=C1C2=C43 BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- AIFRHYZBTHREPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N β-carboline Chemical compound N1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 AIFRHYZBTHREPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- SXGMVGOVILIERA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-diaminobutanoic acid Chemical compound CC(N)C(N)C(O)=O SXGMVGOVILIERA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000004974 2-butenyl group Chemical group C(C=CC)* 0.000 description 3
- PECYZEOJVXMISF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-aminoalanine Chemical compound [NH3+]CC(N)C([O-])=O PECYZEOJVXMISF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- JJDJLFDGCUYZMN-QMMMGPOBSA-N 3-chloro-L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC(Cl)=C1 JJDJLFDGCUYZMN-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GJCOSYZMQJWQCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-xanthene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CC3=CC=CC=C3OC2=C1 GJCOSYZMQJWQCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 125000000882 C2-C6 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000003601 C2-C6 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 102000052510 DNA-Binding Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 101710096438 DNA-binding protein Proteins 0.000 description 3
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glutamic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(O)=O WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004471 Glycine Substances 0.000 description 3
- NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UUOKFMHZSA-N Guanosine Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(=O)NC(N)=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UUOKFMHZSA-N 0.000 description 3
- HTTJABKRGRZYRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Heparin Chemical compound OC1C(NC(=O)C)C(O)OC(COS(O)(=O)=O)C1OC1C(OS(O)(=O)=O)C(O)C(OC2C(C(OS(O)(=O)=O)C(OC3C(C(O)C(O)C(O3)C(O)=O)OS(O)(=O)=O)C(CO)O2)NS(O)(=O)=O)C(C(O)=O)O1 HTTJABKRGRZYRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000238631 Hexapoda Species 0.000 description 3
- 108010001336 Horseradish Peroxidase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000000588 Interleukin-2 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010002350 Interleukin-2 Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108020004684 Internal Ribosome Entry Sites Proteins 0.000 description 3
- HXEACLLIILLPRG-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-pipecolic acid Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)[C@@H]1CCCC[NH2+]1 HXEACLLIILLPRG-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-VIFPVBQESA-N L-tryptophane Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000699666 Mus <mouse, genus> Species 0.000 description 3
- VEYYWZRYIYDQJM-ZETCQYMHSA-N N(2)-acetyl-L-lysine Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@H](C([O-])=O)CCCC[NH3+] VEYYWZRYIYDQJM-ZETCQYMHSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 102100033762 Proheparin-binding EGF-like growth factor Human genes 0.000 description 3
- ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Proline Natural products OC(=O)C1CCCN1 ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 description 3
- 241000723873 Tobacco mosaic virus Species 0.000 description 3
- CUJRVFIICFDLGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetylacetonate Chemical compound CC(=O)[CH-]C(C)=O CUJRVFIICFDLGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000013566 allergen Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000172 allergic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000000612 antigen-presenting cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N arginine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCNC(N)=N ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GFZWHAAOIVMHOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N azetidine-3-carboxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1CNC1 GFZWHAAOIVMHOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000000051 benzyloxy group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])O* 0.000 description 3
- 230000008827 biological function Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910002092 carbon dioxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- VZWXIQHBIQLMPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N chromane Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCCOC2=C1 VZWXIQHBIQLMPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QZHPTGXQGDFGEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N chromene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=C[CH]OC2=C1 QZHPTGXQGDFGEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000006165 cyclic alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- XUJNEKJLAYXESH-UHFFFAOYSA-N cysteine Natural products SCC(N)C(O)=O XUJNEKJLAYXESH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000005549 deoxyribonucleoside Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006806 disease prevention Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000012636 effector Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000008029 eradication Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- RMBPEFMHABBEKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=C[CH]C=CC3=CC2=C1 RMBPEFMHABBEKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 235000013305 food Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229960002897 heparin Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 229920000669 heparin Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000099 in vitro assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- PZOUSPYUWWUPPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N indole Natural products CC1=CC=CC2=C1C=CN2 PZOUSPYUWWUPPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolenine Natural products C1=CC=C2CC=NC2=C1 RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000000959 isobutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 3
- HXEACLLIILLPRG-RXMQYKEDSA-N l-pipecolic acid Natural products OC(=O)[C@H]1CCCCN1 HXEACLLIILLPRG-RXMQYKEDSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 3
- QDLAGTHXVHQKRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N lichenxanthone Natural products COC1=CC(O)=C2C(=O)C3=C(C)C=C(OC)C=C3OC2=C1 QDLAGTHXVHQKRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002858 neurotransmitter agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000003835 nucleoside group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- NIHNNTQXNPWCJQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N o-biphenylenemethane Natural products C1=CC=C2CC3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 NIHNNTQXNPWCJQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000546 pharmaceutical excipient Substances 0.000 description 3
- XDJOIMJURHQYDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenalene Chemical compound C1=CC(CC=C2)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 XDJOIMJURHQYDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000001436 propyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 3
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000010188 recombinant method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002342 ribonucleoside Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000001988 toxicity Effects 0.000 description 3
- 231100000419 toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 3
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 3
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- FQRURPFZTFUXEZ-MRVPVSSYSA-N (2s)-2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-(n-fluoroanilino)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@](F)(C(F)(F)F)N(F)C1=CC=CC=C1 FQRURPFZTFUXEZ-MRVPVSSYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BVAUMRCGVHUWOZ-ZETCQYMHSA-N (2s)-2-(cyclohexylazaniumyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](C)NC1CCCCC1 BVAUMRCGVHUWOZ-ZETCQYMHSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PECGVEGMRUZOML-AWEZNQCLSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3,3-diphenylpropanoic acid Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C([C@H](N)C(O)=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 PECGVEGMRUZOML-AWEZNQCLSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GDMOHOYNMWWBAU-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(3-bromophenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC(Br)=C1 GDMOHOYNMWWBAU-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BURBNIPKSRJAIQ-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC(C(F)(F)F)=C1 BURBNIPKSRJAIQ-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YTHDRUZHNYKZGF-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-azaniumyl-3-(3-nitrophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC([N+]([O-])=O)=C1 YTHDRUZHNYKZGF-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000006708 (C5-C14) heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000003088 (fluoren-9-ylmethoxy)carbonyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- FLBAYUMRQUHISI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,8-naphthyridine Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC=CN=C21 FLBAYUMRQUHISI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004973 1-butenyl group Chemical group C(=CCC)* 0.000 description 2
- 125000004972 1-butynyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C#C* 0.000 description 2
- BAXOFTOLAUCFNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-indazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=NNC2=C1 BAXOFTOLAUCFNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MFJCPDOGFAYSTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-isochromene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2COC=CC2=C1 MFJCPDOGFAYSTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AAQTWLBJPNLKHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-perimidine Chemical compound N1C=NC2=CC=CC3=CC=CC1=C32 AAQTWLBJPNLKHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ODMMNALOCMNQJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-pyrrolizine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CC=CN21 ODMMNALOCMNQJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid (2S,3S)-3,4-dimethyl-2-phenylmorpholine Chemical compound OC(C(O)C(O)=O)C(O)=O.C[C@H]1[C@@H](OCCN1C)c1ccccc1 VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 0.000 description 2
- OGNSCSPNOLGXSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4-diaminobutyric acid Chemical compound NCCC(N)C(O)=O OGNSCSPNOLGXSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UXGVMFHEKMGWMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-benzofuran Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=COC=C21 UXGVMFHEKMGWMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001494 2-propynyl group Chemical group [H]C#CC([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- VHMICKWLTGFITH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2H-isoindole Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CNC=C21 VHMICKWLTGFITH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MGADZUXDNSDTHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2H-pyran Chemical compound C1OC=CC=C1 MGADZUXDNSDTHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MLLSSTJTARJLHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-aminocyclopentane-1-carboxylic acid Chemical compound NC1CCC(C(O)=O)C1 MLLSSTJTARJLHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000474 3-butynyl group Chemical group [H]C#CC([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- JZRBSTONIYRNRI-VIFPVBQESA-N 3-methylphenylalanine Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)=C1 JZRBSTONIYRNRI-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 2
- UZOVYGYOLBIAJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-isocyanato-4'-methyldiphenylmethane Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1CC1=CC=C(N=C=O)C=C1 UZOVYGYOLBIAJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GDRVFDDBLLKWRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4H-quinolizine Chemical compound C1=CC=CN2CC=CC=C21 GDRVFDDBLLKWRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JJMDCOVWQOJGCB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-aminopentanoic acid Chemical compound [NH3+]CCCCC([O-])=O JJMDCOVWQOJGCB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000936 Agarose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 101001011741 Bos taurus Insulin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101710132601 Capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000014914 Carrier Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 101710094648 Coat protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 150000008574 D-amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 241000702421 Dependoparvovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen disulfide Chemical compound SS BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 description 2
- 102100021181 Golgi phosphoprotein 3 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 101000766306 Homo sapiens Serotransferrin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N Hydroxyproline Chemical compound O[C@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000001706 Immunoglobulin Fab Fragments Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010054477 Immunoglobulin Fab Fragments Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000008394 Immunoglobulin Fragments Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010021625 Immunoglobulin Fragments Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100037850 Interferon gamma Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 102000006992 Interferon-alpha Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010047761 Interferon-alpha Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000008070 Interferon-gamma Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 102000013462 Interleukin-12 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010065805 Interleukin-12 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- RHGKLRLOHDJJDR-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-citrulline Chemical compound NC(=O)NCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O RHGKLRLOHDJJDR-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-ZXPFJRLXSA-N L-methionine (R)-S-oxide Chemical compound C[S@@](=O)CC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-ZXPFJRLXSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SNDPXSYFESPGGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N L-norVal-OH Natural products CCCC(N)C(O)=O SNDPXSYFESPGGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Leucine Natural products CC(C)CC(N)C(O)=O ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101710125418 Major capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 2
- 108091061960 Naked DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101710141454 Nucleoprotein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 2
- ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oxazole Chemical compound C1=COC=N1 ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000002193 Pain Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 108010067902 Peptide Library Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 101710083689 Probable capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- WTKZEGDFNFYCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazole Chemical compound C=1C=NNC=1 WTKZEGDFNFYCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrimidine Chemical compound C1=CN=CN=C1 CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108010003581 Ribulose-bisphosphate carboxylase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 240000004808 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Species 0.000 description 2
- 108010077895 Sarcosine Proteins 0.000 description 2
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000700584 Simplexvirus Species 0.000 description 2
- UIIMBOGNXHQVGW-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium bicarbonate Chemical compound [Na+].OC([O-])=O UIIMBOGNXHQVGW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 241000256251 Spodoptera frugiperda Species 0.000 description 2
- FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiazole Chemical compound C1=CSC=N1 FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N Thymidine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)C1 IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SLGBZMMZGDRARJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Triphenylene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 SLGBZMMZGDRARJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tryptophan Natural products C1=CC=C2C(CC(N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N Uridine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N 0.000 description 2
- DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N [1,10]phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CN=C2C3=NC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JDPAVWAQGBGGHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N aceanthrylene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C(C=CC3=CC=C4)=C3C4=CC2=C1 JDPAVWAQGBGGHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004054 acenaphthylenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC2=CC=CC3=CC=CC1=C23)* 0.000 description 2
- SQFPKRNUGBRTAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N acephenanthrylene Chemical group C1=CC(C=C2)=C3C2=CC2=CC=CC=C2C3=C1 SQFPKRNUGBRTAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HXGDTGSAIMULJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetnaphthylene Chemical group C1=CC(C=C2)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 HXGDTGSAIMULJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N acridine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000002015 acyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000033289 adaptive immune response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002671 adjuvant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000443 aerosol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001336 alkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001345 alkine derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- HSFWRNGVRCDJHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-acetylene Natural products C#C HSFWRNGVRCDJHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000003455 anaphylaxis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229940125715 antihistaminic agent Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000000739 antihistaminic agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- BVUSIQTYUVWOSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N arsindole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2[As]C=CC2=C1 BVUSIQTYUVWOSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KNNXFYIMEYKHBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N as-indacene Chemical group C1=CC2=CC=CC2=C2C=CC=C21 KNNXFYIMEYKHBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- RFRXIWQYSOIBDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzarone Chemical compound CCC=1OC2=CC=CC=C2C=1C(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 RFRXIWQYSOIBDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BNBQRQQYDMDJAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzodioxan Chemical compound C1=CC=C2OCCOC2=C1 BNBQRQQYDMDJAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001797 benzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- 108091008324 binding proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920001222 biopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- IXIBAKNTJSCKJM-BUBXBXGNSA-N bovine insulin Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@H]1CSSC[C@H]2C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@H](C(N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)C(=O)N[C@@H](CSSC[C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=3NC=NC=3)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)CNC1=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(O)=O)=O)CSSC[C@@H](C(N2)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)CN)[C@@H](C)CC)C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(C)C)C1=CN=CN1 IXIBAKNTJSCKJM-BUBXBXGNSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940098773 bovine serum albumin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 125000005510 but-1-en-2-yl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000005514 but-1-yn-3-yl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 210000004899 c-terminal region Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000002775 capsule Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000000423 cell based assay Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000003169 central nervous system Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000012539 chromatography resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- OTAFHZMPRISVEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N chromone Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=O)C=COC2=C1 OTAFHZMPRISVEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WCZVZNOTHYJIEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N cinnoline Chemical compound N1=NC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 WCZVZNOTHYJIEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940125904 compound 1 Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000009833 condensation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005494 condensation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000001923 cyclic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 235000018417 cysteine Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000003085 diluting agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002552 dosage form Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002222 downregulating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000004520 electroporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005538 encapsulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002534 ethynyl group Chemical group [H]C#C* 0.000 description 2
- GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001506 fluorescence spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 102000034287 fluorescent proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108091006047 fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229920000140 heteropolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- QSQIGGCOCHABAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexacene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC5=CC6=CC=CC=C6C=C5C=C4C=C3C=C21 QSQIGGCOCHABAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004836 hexamethylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([*:2])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[*:1] 0.000 description 2
- PKIFBGYEEVFWTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexaphene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C=C3C4=CC5=CC6=CC=CC=C6C=C5C=C4C=CC3=CC2=C1 PKIFBGYEEVFWTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920001519 homopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 210000004408 hybridoma Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 229960000890 hydrocortisone Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000003018 immunoassay Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001506 immunosuppresive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- HOBCFUWDNJPFHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolizine Chemical compound C1=CC=CN2C=CC=C21 HOBCFUWDNJPFHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960003130 interferon gamma Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229940117681 interleukin-12 Drugs 0.000 description 2
- GWVMLCQWXVFZCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoindoline Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CNCC2=C1 GWVMLCQWXVFZCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000555 isopropenyl group Chemical group [H]\C([H])=C(\*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- ZLTPDFXIESTBQG-UHFFFAOYSA-N isothiazole Chemical compound C=1C=NSC=1 ZLTPDFXIESTBQG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CTAPFRYPJLPFDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoxazole Chemical compound C=1C=NOC=1 CTAPFRYPJLPFDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001638 lipofection Methods 0.000 description 2
- VWHRYODZTDMVSS-QMMMGPOBSA-N m-fluoro-L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC(F)=C1 VWHRYODZTDMVSS-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium stearate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000010534 mechanism of action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004060 metabolic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- 244000005700 microbiome Species 0.000 description 2
- 238000000520 microinjection Methods 0.000 description 2
- BQJCRHHNABKAKU-KBQPJGBKSA-N morphine Chemical compound O([C@H]1[C@H](C=C[C@H]23)O)C4=C5[C@@]12CCN(C)[C@@H]3CC5=CC=C4O BQJCRHHNABKAKU-KBQPJGBKSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004108 n-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- 150000003833 nucleoside derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- PFTXKXWAXWAZBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N octacene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC5=CC6=CC7=CC8=CC=CC=C8C=C7C=C6C=C5C=C4C=C3C=C21 PFTXKXWAXWAZBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OVPVGJFDFSJUIG-UHFFFAOYSA-N octalene Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C2C=CC=CC=CC2=C1 OVPVGJFDFSJUIG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WTFQBTLMPISHTA-UHFFFAOYSA-N octaphene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C=C(C=C3C4=CC5=CC6=CC7=CC=CC=C7C=C6C=C5C=C4C=CC3=C3)C3=CC2=C1 WTFQBTLMPISHTA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019198 oils Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000002674 ointment Substances 0.000 description 2
- LSQODMMMSXHVCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ovalene Chemical group C1=C(C2=C34)C=CC3=CC=C(C=C3C5=C6C(C=C3)=CC=C3C6=C6C(C=C3)=C3)C4=C5C6=C2C3=C1 LSQODMMMSXHVCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WCPAKWJPBJAGKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxadiazole Chemical compound C1=CON=N1 WCPAKWJPBJAGKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000007800 oxidant agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- PMJHHCWVYXUKFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N penta-1,3-diene Chemical group CC=CC=C PMJHHCWVYXUKFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SLIUAWYAILUBJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentacene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC5=CC=CC=C5C=C4C=C3C=C21 SLIUAWYAILUBJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GUVXZFRDPCKWEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentalene Chemical group C1=CC2=CC=CC2=C1 GUVXZFRDPCKWEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JQQSUOJIMKJQHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentaphene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C=C3C4=CC5=CC=CC=C5C=C4C=CC3=CC2=C1 JQQSUOJIMKJQHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000010647 peptide synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000816 peptidomimetic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000002080 perylenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=C2C=CC=C3C4=CC=CC5=CC=CC(C1=C23)=C45)* 0.000 description 2
- CSHWQDPOILHKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N peryrene Chemical group C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=3C2=C2C=CC=3)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 CSHWQDPOILHKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 2
- 150000003013 phosphoric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- LFSXCDWNBUNEEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalazine Chemical compound C1=NN=CC2=CC=CC=C21 LFSXCDWNBUNEEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HXEACLLIILLPRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N pipecolic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1CCCCN1 HXEACLLIILLPRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000036470 plasma concentration Effects 0.000 description 2
- DIJNSQQKNIVDPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N pleiadene Chemical group C1=C2[CH]C=CC=C2C=C2C=CC=C3[C]2C1=CC=C3 DIJNSQQKNIVDPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910052700 potassium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000006238 prop-1-en-1-yl group Chemical group [H]\C(*)=C(/[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- 125000006239 protecting group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- XNSAINXGIQZQOO-SRVKXCTJSA-N protirelin Chemical compound NC(=O)[C@@H]1CCCN1C(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H]1NC(=O)CC1)CC1=CN=CN1 XNSAINXGIQZQOO-SRVKXCTJSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CPNGPNLZQNNVQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N pteridine Chemical compound N1=CN=CC2=NC=CN=C21 CPNGPNLZQNNVQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LNKHTYQPVMAJSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyranthrene Chemical group C1=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=C(C=C3)C2=C2C3=CC3=C(C=CC=C4)C4=CC4=CC=C1C2=C34 LNKHTYQPVMAJSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PBMFSQRYOILNGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridazine Chemical compound C1=CC=NN=C1 PBMFSQRYOILNGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridine Natural products COC1=CC=CN=C1 UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JWVCLYRUEFBMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinazoline Chemical compound N1=CN=CC2=CC=CC=C21 JWVCLYRUEFBMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007363 ring formation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000006413 ring segment Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- FMKFBRKHHLWKDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N rubicene Chemical group C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC3=C2C1=C1C=CC=C2C4=CC=CC=C4C3=C21 FMKFBRKHHLWKDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WEMQMWWWCBYPOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N s-indacene Chemical group C=1C2=CC=CC2=CC2=CC=CC2=1 WEMQMWWWCBYPOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000008279 sol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 2
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007920 subcutaneous administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000375 suspending agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009885 systemic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000003536 tetrazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 2
- VLLMWSRANPNYQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N thiadiazole Chemical compound C1=CSN=N1.C1=CSN=N1 VLLMWSRANPNYQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 2
- 229930192474 thiophene Natural products 0.000 description 2
- 238000011200 topical administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000003852 triazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000005580 triphenylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229910052722 tritium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 241000701447 unidentified baculovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001515965 unidentified phage Species 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052720 vanadium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- DIGQNXIGRZPYDK-WKSCXVIASA-N (2R)-6-amino-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[2-[[(2R)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2R,3S)-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2R)-2-[[(2S,3S)-2-[[(2R)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2R)-2-[[2-[[2-[[2-[(2-amino-1-hydroxyethylidene)amino]-3-carboxy-1-hydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1-hydroxypropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxybutylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxypropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1,5-dihydroxy-5-iminopentylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxybutylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]hexanoic acid Chemical compound C[C@@H]([C@@H](C(=N[C@@H](CS)C(=N[C@@H](C)C(=N[C@@H](CO)C(=NCC(=N[C@@H](CCC(=N)O)C(=NC(CS)C(=N[C@H]([C@H](C)O)C(=N[C@H](CS)C(=N[C@H](CO)C(=NCC(=N[C@H](CS)C(=NCC(=N[C@H](CCCCN)C(=O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)N=C([C@H](CS)N=C([C@H](CO)N=C([C@H](CO)N=C([C@H](C)N=C(CN=C([C@H](CO)N=C([C@H](CS)N=C(CN=C(C(CS)N=C(C(CC(=O)O)N=C(CN)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O DIGQNXIGRZPYDK-WKSCXVIASA-N 0.000 description 1
- NMDDZEVVQDPECF-LURJTMIESA-N (2s)-2,7-diaminoheptanoic acid Chemical compound NCCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O NMDDZEVVQDPECF-LURJTMIESA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZENNTZUZBRESKJ-ZETCQYMHSA-N (2s)-2-(1-benzothiophen-2-ylamino)propanoic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(N[C@@H](C)C(O)=O)=CC2=C1 ZENNTZUZBRESKJ-ZETCQYMHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IYKLZBIWFXPUCS-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-(naphthalen-1-ylamino)propanoic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(N[C@@H](C)C(O)=O)=CC=CC2=C1 IYKLZBIWFXPUCS-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- MRTPISKDZDHEQI-YFKPBYRVSA-N (2s)-2-(tert-butylamino)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(C)(C)C MRTPISKDZDHEQI-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NPDBDJFLKKQMCM-SCSAIBSYSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoic acid Chemical compound CC(C)(C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O NPDBDJFLKKQMCM-SCSAIBSYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBZIGVCQRXJYQD-YFKPBYRVSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(1,3-thiazol-4-yl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CSC=N1 WBZIGVCQRXJYQD-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JFVLNTLXEZDFHW-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(2-bromophenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1Br JFVLNTLXEZDFHW-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NHBKDLSKDKUGSB-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(2-methylphenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1C[C@H](N)C(O)=O NHBKDLSKDKUGSB-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- NRCSJHVDTAAISV-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(Cl)C(Cl)=C1 NRCSJHVDTAAISV-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZHUOMTMPTNZOJE-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(3-cyanophenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC(C#N)=C1 ZHUOMTMPTNZOJE-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- PEMUHKUIQHFMTH-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(4-bromophenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(Br)C=C1 PEMUHKUIQHFMTH-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KWIPUXXIFQQMKN-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(4-cyanophenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(C#N)C=C1 KWIPUXXIFQQMKN-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- DQLHSFUMICQIMB-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-(4-methylphenyl)propanoic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)C=C1 DQLHSFUMICQIMB-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- IOABLDGLYOGEHY-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-[2-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1C(F)(F)F IOABLDGLYOGEHY-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GNVNKFUEUXUWDV-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-[4-(aminomethyl)phenyl]propanoic acid Chemical compound NCC1=CC=C(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)C=C1 GNVNKFUEUXUWDV-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- GAJBPZXIKZXTCG-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-[4-(azidomethyl)phenyl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(CN=[N+]=[N-])C=C1 GAJBPZXIKZXTCG-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- CRFFPDBJLGAGQL-QMMMGPOBSA-N (2s)-2-amino-3-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]propanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(C(F)(F)F)C=C1 CRFFPDBJLGAGQL-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SDZGVFSSLGTJAJ-ZETCQYMHSA-N (2s)-2-azaniumyl-3-(2-nitrophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1[N+]([O-])=O SDZGVFSSLGTJAJ-ZETCQYMHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ADJZXDVMJPTFKT-JTQLQIEISA-N (2s)-2-azaniumyl-4-(1h-indol-3-yl)butanoate Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(CC[C@H](N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 ADJZXDVMJPTFKT-JTQLQIEISA-N 0.000 description 1
- FMUMEWVNYMUECA-LURJTMIESA-N (2s)-2-azaniumyl-5-methylhexanoate Chemical compound CC(C)CC[C@H](N)C(O)=O FMUMEWVNYMUECA-LURJTMIESA-N 0.000 description 1
- XOZMVGJVSFVJGA-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-3-phenyl-2-(phosphonomethylamino)propanoic acid Chemical compound OP(=O)(O)CN[C@H](C(=O)O)CC1=CC=CC=C1 XOZMVGJVSFVJGA-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- LJRDOKAZOAKLDU-UDXJMMFXSA-N (2s,3s,4r,5r,6r)-5-amino-2-(aminomethyl)-6-[(2r,3s,4r,5s)-5-[(1r,2r,3s,5r,6s)-3,5-diamino-2-[(2s,3r,4r,5s,6r)-3-amino-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-6-hydroxycyclohexyl]oxy-4-hydroxy-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl]oxyoxane-3,4-diol;sulfuric ac Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O.N[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](CN)O[C@@H]1O[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](N)C[C@@H](N)[C@@H]2O)O[C@@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)N)O[C@@H]1CO LJRDOKAZOAKLDU-UDXJMMFXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ASWBNKHCZGQVJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N (3-hexadecanoyloxy-2-hydroxypropyl) 2-(trimethylazaniumyl)ethyl phosphate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(O)COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C ASWBNKHCZGQVJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPDDTAJMJCESGV-CTUHWIOQSA-M (3r,5r)-7-[2-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-[methyl-[(1r)-1-phenylethyl]carbamoyl]-4-propan-2-ylpyrazol-3-yl]-3,5-dihydroxyheptanoate Chemical compound C1([C@@H](C)N(C)C(=O)C2=NN(C(CC[C@@H](O)C[C@@H](O)CC([O-])=O)=C2C(C)C)C=2C=CC(F)=CC=2)=CC=CC=C1 MPDDTAJMJCESGV-CTUHWIOQSA-M 0.000 description 1
- UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N -2-Amino-4-hydroxybutanoic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCO UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BWKMGYQJPOAASG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CNC(C(=O)O)CC2=C1 BWKMGYQJPOAASG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DDMOUSALMHHKOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-dichloro-1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane Chemical compound FC(F)(Cl)C(F)(F)Cl DDMOUSALMHHKOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-beta-D-Xylofuranosyl-NH-Cytosine Natural products O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1C1C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IIZPXYDJLKNOIY-JXPKJXOSSA-N 1-palmitoyl-2-arachidonoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCC\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC IIZPXYDJLKNOIY-JXPKJXOSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UFBJCMHMOXMLKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4-dinitrophenol Chemical compound OC1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1[N+]([O-])=O UFBJCMHMOXMLKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GWHQTNKPTXDNRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-3-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1Cl GWHQTNKPTXDNRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UEFLPVKMPDEMFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-3-(2,4-difluorophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(F)C=C1F UEFLPVKMPDEMFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CVZZNRXMDCOHBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-3-(2-chlorophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1Cl CVZZNRXMDCOHBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OCDHPLVCNWBKJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-3-(2-cyanophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1C#N OCDHPLVCNWBKJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PRAWYXDDKCVZTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-3-(3,4-difluorophenyl)propanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(F)C(F)=C1 PRAWYXDDKCVZTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WTOFYLAWDLQMBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-3-thiophen-2-ylpropanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CS1 WTOFYLAWDLQMBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BFSVOASYOCHEOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-diethylaminoethanol Chemical compound CCN(CC)CCO BFSVOASYOCHEOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NYCRCTMDYITATC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-fluorophenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1F NYCRCTMDYITATC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KRTGJZMJJVEKRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenylethan-1-yl Chemical group [CH2]CC1=CC=CC=C1 KRTGJZMJJVEKRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PECYZEOJVXMISF-REOHCLBHSA-N 3-amino-L-alanine Chemical compound [NH3+]C[C@H](N)C([O-])=O PECYZEOJVXMISF-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BXRLWGXPSRYJDZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-cyanoalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC#N BXRLWGXPSRYJDZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IRZQDMYEJPNDEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-phenyl-2-aminobutanoic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)C(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 IRZQDMYEJPNDEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FWMNVWWHGCHHJJ-SKKKGAJSSA-N 4-amino-1-[(2r)-6-amino-2-[[(2r)-2-[[(2r)-2-[[(2r)-2-amino-3-phenylpropanoyl]amino]-3-phenylpropanoyl]amino]-4-methylpentanoyl]amino]hexanoyl]piperidine-4-carboxylic acid Chemical compound C([C@H](C(=O)N[C@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N1CCC(N)(CC1)C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 FWMNVWWHGCHHJJ-SKKKGAJSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CMUHFUGDYMFHEI-QMMMGPOBSA-N 4-amino-L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(N)C=C1 CMUHFUGDYMFHEI-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XWHHYOYVRVGJJY-QMMMGPOBSA-N 4-fluoro-L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(F)C=C1 XWHHYOYVRVGJJY-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PZNQZSRPDOEBMS-QMMMGPOBSA-N 4-iodo-L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(I)C=C1 PZNQZSRPDOEBMS-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GTVVZTAFGPQSPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-nitrophenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1 GTVVZTAFGPQSPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710169336 5'-deoxyadenosine deaminase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- MSLKMRUEVOYOOZ-VBYMZDBQSA-L 519-62-0 Chemical compound [Mg+2].[N-]1C2=C(C=3[C@H]([C@H](C)C(=CC=4C(=C(C=C)C(=C5)N=4)C)N=3)CCC(=O)OC\C=C(/C)CCC[C@H](C)CCC[C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@H](C(=O)OC)C([O-])=C2C(C)=C1C=C1C(CC)=C(C=O)C5=N1 MSLKMRUEVOYOOZ-VBYMZDBQSA-L 0.000 description 1
- SLXKOJJOQWFEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-aminohexanoic acid Chemical compound NCCCCCC(O)=O SLXKOJJOQWFEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZDRFDHHANOYUTE-IOSLPCCCSA-N 6-methylthioinosine Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(SC)=NC=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O ZDRFDHHANOYUTE-IOSLPCCCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100031126 6-phosphogluconolactonase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010029731 6-phosphogluconolactonase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- HDZZVAMISRMYHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9beta-Ribofuranosyl-7-deazaadenin Natural products C1=CC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1O HDZZVAMISRMYHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000055025 Adenosine deaminases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000009346 Adenosine receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050000203 Adenosine receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010001497 Agitation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102000002260 Alkaline Phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004774 Alkaline Phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000019489 Almond oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 206010002198 Anaphylactic reaction Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108700031308 Antennapedia Homeodomain Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004475 Arginine Substances 0.000 description 1
- DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Asparagine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC(N)=O DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010003497 Asphyxia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010003645 Atopy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241001203868 Autographa californica Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 1
- DWRXFEITVBNRMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Beta-D-1-Arabinofuranosylthymine Natural products O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1C1C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1 DWRXFEITVBNRMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 201000006474 Brain Ischemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- RIRARCHMRDHZAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC1C(C)CCC1 Chemical compound CC1C(C)CCC1 RIRARCHMRDHZAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150013553 CD40 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 210000003967 CLP Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000282465 Canis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001092081 Carpenteria Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010078791 Carrier Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000701489 Cauliflower mosaic virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010008120 Cerebral ischaemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108090000227 Chymases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003858 Chymases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004705 Codon Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000035473 Communicable disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920002261 Corn starch Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 241000186216 Corynebacterium Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000699802 Cricetulus griseus Species 0.000 description 1
- MIKUYHXYGGJMLM-GIMIYPNGSA-N Crotonoside Natural products C1=NC2=C(N)NC(=O)N=C2N1[C@H]1O[C@@H](CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O MIKUYHXYGGJMLM-GIMIYPNGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-PSQAKQOGSA-N Cytidine Natural products O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-guanosine Natural products C1=2NC(N)=NC(=O)C=2N=CN1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1O NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000053602 DNA Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920002307 Dextran Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004338 Dichlorodifluoromethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010013700 Drug hypersensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000792859 Enema Species 0.000 description 1
- 101150067056 Epsilon gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000701959 Escherichia virus Lambda Species 0.000 description 1
- NIGWMJHCCYYCSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fenclonine Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 NIGWMJHCCYYCSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000004262 Food Hypersensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229930191892 Formycin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- KBHMEHLJSZMEMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formycin A Natural products N1N=C2C(N)=NC=NC2=C1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1O KBHMEHLJSZMEMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000045 G-Protein-Coupled Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003688 G-Protein-Coupled Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100039556 Galectin-4 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N Glucose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010018962 Glucosephosphate Dehydrogenase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 244000068988 Glycine max Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000010469 Glycine max Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101000619542 Homo sapiens E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase parkin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000608765 Homo sapiens Galectin-4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001002709 Homo sapiens Interleukin-4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000009015 Human TaqMan MicroRNA Assay kit Methods 0.000 description 1
- 102000009438 IgE Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010073816 IgE Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 206010061218 Inflammation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229930010555 Inosine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N Inosine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C2=NC=NC(O)=C2N=C1 UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000006877 Insect Bites and Stings Diseases 0.000 description 1
- SNDPXSYFESPGGJ-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-2-aminopentanoic acid Chemical compound CCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O SNDPXSYFESPGGJ-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QUOGESRFPZDMMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N L-Homoarginine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCCNC(N)=N QUOGESRFPZDMMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LOOZZTFGSTZNRX-VIFPVBQESA-N L-Homotyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 LOOZZTFGSTZNRX-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- AHLPHDHHMVZTML-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-Ornithine Chemical compound NCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O AHLPHDHHMVZTML-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QWCKQJZIFLGMSD-VKHMYHEASA-N L-alpha-aminobutyric acid Chemical compound CC[C@H](N)C(O)=O QWCKQJZIFLGMSD-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZGUNAGUHMKGQNY-ZETCQYMHSA-N L-alpha-phenylglycine zwitterion Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)C1=CC=CC=C1 ZGUNAGUHMKGQNY-ZETCQYMHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930182816 L-glutamine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- QUOGESRFPZDMMT-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-homoarginine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCCNC(N)=N QUOGESRFPZDMMT-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FFFHZYDWPBMWHY-VKHMYHEASA-N L-homocysteine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCS FFFHZYDWPBMWHY-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- JTTHKOPSMAVJFE-VIFPVBQESA-N L-homophenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC1=CC=CC=C1 JTTHKOPSMAVJFE-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-VKHMYHEASA-N L-homoserine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCO UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000003855 L-lactate dehydrogenase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108700023483 L-lactate dehydrogenases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N L-methionine sulphoxide Natural products CS(=O)CCC(N)C(O)=O QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DGYHPLMPMRKMPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N L-propargyl glycine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC#C DGYHPLMPMRKMPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000007811 Latex Hypersensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108090001090 Lectins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004856 Lectins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 240000007472 Leucaena leucocephala Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000010643 Leucaena leucocephala Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241001490312 Lithops pseudotruncatella Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004472 Lysine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019759 Maize starch Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 102000003792 Metallothionein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000157 Metallothionein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- DBTDEFJAFBUGPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanethial Chemical group S=C DBTDEFJAFBUGPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000168 Microcrystalline cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 102000016943 Muramidase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010014251 Muramidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000005717 Myeloma Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010045503 Myeloma Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010062010 N-Acetylmuramoyl-L-alanine Amidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000005481 NMR spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- RHGKLRLOHDJJDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ndelta-carbamoyl-DL-ornithine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCNC(N)=O RHGKLRLOHDJJDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710149086 Nuclease S1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- BZQFBWGGLXLEPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N O-phosphoryl-L-serine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)COP(O)(O)=O BZQFBWGGLXLEPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AHLPHDHHMVZTML-UHFFFAOYSA-N Orn-delta-NH2 Natural products NCCCC(N)C(O)=O AHLPHDHHMVZTML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UTJLXEIPEHZYQJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ornithine Natural products OC(=O)C(C)CCCN UTJLXEIPEHZYQJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150096038 PTH1R gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 240000002390 Pandanus odoratissimus Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000005311 Pandanus odoratissimus Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241001631646 Papillomaviridae Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000057297 Pepsin A Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000284 Pepsin A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000233805 Phoenix Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010004729 Phycoerythrin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000276498 Pollachius virens Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010076039 Polyproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920001213 Polysorbate 20 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Potassium Chemical compound [K] ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XESARGFCSKSFID-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazofurin Natural products OC1=C(C(=O)N)NN=C1C1C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1 XESARGFCSKSFID-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010008281 Recombinant Fusion Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000007056 Recombinant Fusion Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 208000035415 Reinfection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102100037486 Reverse transcriptase/ribonuclease H Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 208000036071 Rhinorrhea Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010039101 Rhinorrhoea Diseases 0.000 description 1
- IWUCXVSUMQZMFG-AFCXAGJDSA-N Ribavirin Chemical compound N1=C(C(=O)N)N=CN1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 IWUCXVSUMQZMFG-AFCXAGJDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000283984 Rodentia Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010039251 Rubber sensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940124639 Selective inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229920002684 Sepharose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Serine Natural products OCC(N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 244000191761 Sida cordifolia Species 0.000 description 1
- DBMJMQXJHONAFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium laurylsulphate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCCOS([O-])(=O)=O DBMJMQXJHONAFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229920002472 Starch Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000024932 T cell mediated immunity Effects 0.000 description 1
- AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Threonine Natural products CC(O)C(N)C(O)=O AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004473 Threonine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108700009124 Transcription Initiation Site Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000009618 Transforming Growth Factors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010009583 Transforming Growth Factors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- YZCKVEUIGOORGS-NJFSPNSNSA-N Tritium Chemical group [3H] YZCKVEUIGOORGS-NJFSPNSNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100040245 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 5 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010046334 Urease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000700618 Vaccinia virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010046865 Vaccinia virus infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Valine Chemical compound CC(C)C(N)C(O)=O KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108700005077 Viral Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004480 active ingredient Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000013543 active substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000131 acute cytotoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003121 adenosine kinase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000001335 aliphatic alkanes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001338 aliphatic hydrocarbons Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- WNNNWFKQCKFSDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N allylglycine Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC=C WNNNWFKQCKFSDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000008168 almond oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- WNROFYMDJYEPJX-UHFFFAOYSA-K aluminium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[OH-].[OH-].[Al+3] WNROFYMDJYEPJX-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 230000001668 ameliorated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002862 amidating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003708 ampul Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000202 analgesic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036783 anaphylactic response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004102 animal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001773 anti-convulsant effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001387 anti-histamine Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003110 anti-inflammatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960003121 arginine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000002029 aromatic hydrocarbon group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002014 arsindolyl group Chemical group [AsH]1C(=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000005018 aryl alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005015 aryl alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960001230 asparagine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000009582 asparagine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940009098 aspartate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 244000052616 bacterial pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940125388 beta agonist Drugs 0.000 description 1
- WTOFYLAWDLQMBZ-LURJTMIESA-N beta(2-thienyl)alanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CS1 WTOFYLAWDLQMBZ-LURJTMIESA-N 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-FPRJBGLDSA-N beta-D-galactose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-FPRJBGLDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-L-thymidine Natural products O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1 IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N beta-L-uridine Natural products O[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UCMIRNVEIXFBKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-alanine Chemical compound NCCC(O)=O UCMIRNVEIXFBKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012148 binding buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036772 blood pressure Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001185 bone marrow Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000621 bronchi Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000000337 buffer salt Substances 0.000 description 1
- 244000309464 bull Species 0.000 description 1
- 125000004369 butenyl group Chemical group C(=CCC)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000000484 butyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000480 butynyl group Chemical group [*]C#CC([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FUFJGUQYACFECW-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium hydrogenphosphate Chemical compound [Ca+2].OP([O-])([O-])=O FUFJGUQYACFECW-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000001506 calcium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000389 calcium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011010 calcium phosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000001569 carbon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960004424 carbon dioxide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 1
- 150000001732 carboxylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000005961 cardioprotection Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000748 cardiovascular system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001768 cations Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000007910 cell fusion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000006285 cell suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004671 cell-free system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010980 cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 206010008118 cerebral infarction Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000002738 chelating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- UFWLHIVKHDCSHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N chembl1595789 Chemical compound NC1=NC(N)=NC(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)O)=N1 UFWLHIVKHDCSHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005081 chemiluminescent agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- ATNHDLDRLWWWCB-DVXFRRMCSA-O chlorophyll a Chemical compound [Mg+2].[N-]1C(C=C2[C@H]([C@H](CCC(=O)OC\C=C(/C)CCC[C@H](C)CCC[C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)C(=[NH+]2)C2=C3[N-]C(=C4)C(C)=C3C(=O)[C@H]2C(=O)OC)C)=C(C)C(C=C)=C1C=C1C(C)=C(CC)C4=[NH+]1 ATNHDLDRLWWWCB-DVXFRRMCSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 229930002868 chlorophyll a Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 229930002869 chlorophyll b Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002173 citrulline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000013477 citrulline Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000003776 cleavage reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940110456 cocoa butter Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019868 cocoa butter Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 206010009887 colitis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009137 competitive binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013068 control sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013270 controlled release Methods 0.000 description 1
- IDLFZVILOHSSID-OVLDLUHVSA-N corticotropin Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCSC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CO)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 IDLFZVILOHSSID-OVLDLUHVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000006071 cream Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012258 culturing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000000058 cyclopentadienyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC1)* 0.000 description 1
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-ZAKLUEHWSA-N cytidine Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-ZAKLUEHWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000000805 cytoplasm Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000172 cytosol Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001086 cytosolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006735 deficit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003405 delayed action preparation Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052805 deuterium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229950006137 dexfosfoserine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019700 dicalcium phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- PXBRQCKWGAHEHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N dichlorodifluoromethane Chemical compound FC(F)(Cl)Cl PXBRQCKWGAHEHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000019404 dichlorodifluoromethane Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940042935 dichlorodifluoromethane Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940087091 dichlorotetrafluoroethane Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000029087 digestion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 206010013023 diphtheria Diseases 0.000 description 1
- LOKCTEFSRHRXRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-I dipotassium trisodium dihydrogen phosphate hydrogen phosphate dichloride Chemical compound P(=O)(O)(O)[O-].[K+].P(=O)(O)([O-])[O-].[Na+].[Na+].[Cl-].[K+].[Cl-].[Na+] LOKCTEFSRHRXRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-I 0.000 description 1
- 239000007884 disintegrant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002270 dispersing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004090 dissolution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012153 distilled water Substances 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dl-hydroxyproline Natural products OC1C[NH2+]C(C([O-])=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009510 drug design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003995 emulsifying agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001804 emulsifying effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- ZSWFCLXCOIISFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N endo-cyclopentadiene Natural products C1C=CC=C1 ZSWFCLXCOIISFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000007920 enema Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940079360 enema for constipation Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000003623 enhancer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002702 enteric coating Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009505 enteric coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 206010015037 epilepsy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- BEFDCLMNVWHSGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethenylcyclopentane Chemical compound C=CC1CCCC1 BEFDCLMNVWHSGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003203 everyday effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002964 excitative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003925 fat Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019197 fats Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000012091 fetal bovine serum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000945 filler Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000796 flavoring agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein-5-isothiocyanate Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC(N=C=S)=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000003599 food sweetener Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- VEPYXRRTOARCQD-IGPDFVGCSA-N formycin Chemical compound N1=N[C]2C(N)=NC=NC2=C1[C@@H]1O[C@@H](CO)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O VEPYXRRTOARCQD-IGPDFVGCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004108 freeze drying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108020001507 fusion proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000037865 fusion proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001502 gel electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000001476 gene delivery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010353 genetic engineering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229930195712 glutamate Natural products 0.000 description 1
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N glutamine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004676 glycans Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005456 glyceride group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000003102 growth factor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000010005 growth-factor like effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940029575 guanosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000002443 helper t lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 125000004447 heteroarylalkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000004128 high performance liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003630 histaminocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N histidine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CN=CN1 HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000055229 human IL4 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 210000005104 human peripheral blood lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000028996 humoral immune response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- GPRLSGONYQIRFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydron Chemical compound [H+] GPRLSGONYQIRFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002591 hydroxyproline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000001866 hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010979 hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- UFVKGYZPFZQRLF-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Chemical compound OC1C(O)C(OC)OC(CO)C1OC1C(O)C(O)C(OC2C(C(O)C(OC3C(C(O)C(O)C(CO)O3)O)C(CO)O2)O)C(CO)O1 UFVKGYZPFZQRLF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920003088 hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000003100 immobilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001900 immune effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036039 immunity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003317 immunochromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002513 implantation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000126 in silico method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002779 inactivation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002458 infectious effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001524 infective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004054 inflammatory process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007972 injectable composition Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000014674 injury Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910052500 inorganic mineral Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960003786 inosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000017730 intein-mediated protein splicing Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000035990 intercellular signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007927 intramuscular injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010255 intramuscular injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007928 intraperitoneal injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007913 intrathecal administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001990 intravenous administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009545 invasion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004255 ion exchange chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003456 ion exchange resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003303 ion-exchange polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960000310 isoleucine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoleucine Natural products CCC(C)C(N)C(O)=O AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108010045069 keyhole-limpet hemocyanin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 210000003734 kidney Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052747 lanthanoid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000002602 lanthanoids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000004816 latex Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000126 latex Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 201000005391 latex allergy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 235000010445 lecithin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000787 lecithin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940067606 lecithin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002523 lectin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000518 lethal Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000001665 lethal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002617 leukotrienes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 210000004185 liver Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000007937 lozenge Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000314 lubricant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004072 lung Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000002751 lymph Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001926 lymphatic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003563 lymphoid tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000012792 lyophilization process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000006166 lysate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004325 lysozyme Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960000274 lysozyme Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010335 lysozyme Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 159000000003 magnesium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000019359 magnesium stearate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002483 medication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930182817 methionine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 125000006178 methyl benzyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000010270 methyl p-hydroxybenzoate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000000250 methylamino group Chemical group [H]N(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 235000019813 microcrystalline cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008108 microcrystalline cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940016286 microcrystalline cellulose Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011707 mineral Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000007522 mineralic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003607 modifier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010369 molecular cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003068 molecular probe Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960005181 morphine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000031225 myocardial ischemia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- OHDXDNUPVVYWOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-methyl-1-(2-naphthalen-1-ylsulfanylphenyl)methanamine Chemical compound CNCC1=CC=CC=C1SC1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12 OHDXDNUPVVYWOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001624 naphthyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004923 naphthylmethyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12)C* 0.000 description 1
- 229930014626 natural product Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 239000006199 nebulizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001683 neutron diffraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000440 neutrophil Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 125000004433 nitrogen atom Chemical group N* 0.000 description 1
- GHLZUHZBBNDWHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonanamide Chemical compound CCCCCCCCC(N)=O GHLZUHZBBNDWHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002687 nonaqueous vehicle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011275 oncology therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000056 organ Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000007524 organic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000005985 organic acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960003104 ornithine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-O oxonium Chemical compound [OH3+] XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000002741 palatine tonsil Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000496 pancreas Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 102000045222 parkin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000001575 pathological effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960001639 penicillamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940111202 pepsin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002823 phage display Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012247 phenotypical assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenylalanine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BZQFBWGGLXLEPQ-REOHCLBHSA-N phosphoserine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)COP(O)(O)=O BZQFBWGGLXLEPQ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- USRGIUJOYOXOQJ-GBXIJSLDSA-N phosphothreonine Chemical compound OP(=O)(O)O[C@H](C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O USRGIUJOYOXOQJ-GBXIJSLDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004962 physiological condition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000035790 physiological processes and functions Effects 0.000 description 1
- XESARGFCSKSFID-FLLFQEBCSA-N pirazofurin Chemical compound OC1=C(C(=O)N)NN=C1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 XESARGFCSKSFID-FLLFQEBCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001983 poloxamer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000233 poly(alkylene oxides) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000447 polyanionic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005862 polyol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000003077 polyols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000256 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010486 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920001282 polysaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005017 polysaccharide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000020004 porter Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011591 potassium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001592 potato starch Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000001556 precipitation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012913 prioritisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003380 propellant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004368 propenyl group Chemical group C(=CC)* 0.000 description 1
- 235000010232 propyl p-hydroxybenzoate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- QELSKZZBTMNZEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N propylparaben Chemical class CCCOC(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 QELSKZZBTMNZEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002568 propynyl group Chemical group [*]C#CC([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 238000001742 protein purification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002685 pulmonary effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002510 pyrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010791 quenching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000008001 rakum palm Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000003753 real-time PCR Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008707 rearrangement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108091006082 receptor inhibitors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000010410 reperfusion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000029058 respiratory gaseous exchange Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004366 reverse phase liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003757 reverse transcription PCR Methods 0.000 description 1
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HZCAHMRRMINHDJ-DBRKOABJSA-N ribavirin Natural products O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1N=CN=C1 HZCAHMRRMINHDJ-DBRKOABJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000329 ribavirin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940043230 sarcosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000013391 scatchard analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007017 scission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002914 sec-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002864 sequence alignment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108060007624 small GTPase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000030938 small GTPase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 210000002460 smooth muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000030 sodium bicarbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000019333 sodium laurylsulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940079832 sodium starch glycolate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008109 sodium starch glycolate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003109 sodium starch glycolate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000010532 solid phase synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000010199 sorbic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004334 sorbic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940075582 sorbic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010356 sorbitol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000278 spinal cord Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000952 spleen Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012289 standard assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000008107 starch Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940032147 starch Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019698 starch Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000000130 stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000003431 steroids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000638 stimulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012089 stop solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000829 suppository Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002511 suppository base Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003765 sweetening agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006188 syrup Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000020357 syrup Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000454 talc Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052623 talc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N texas red Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(S(Cl)(=O)=O)=CC=C1C(C1=CC=2CCCN3CCCC(C=23)=C1O1)=C2C1=C(CCC1)C3=[N+]1CCCC3=C2 MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 231100001274 therapeutic index Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 150000007970 thio esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940104230 thymidine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000001541 thymus gland Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000451 tissue damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000827 tissue damage Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000000699 topical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- FGMPLJWBKKVCDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-L-hydroxy-proline Natural products ON1CCCC1C(O)=O FGMPLJWBKKVCDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002103 transcriptional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000037317 transdermal delivery Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010361 transduction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000026683 transduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008733 trauma Effects 0.000 description 1
- QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H tricalcium bis(phosphate) Chemical compound [Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 1
- CYRMSUTZVYGINF-UHFFFAOYSA-N trichlorofluoromethane Chemical compound FC(Cl)(Cl)Cl CYRMSUTZVYGINF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940029284 trichlorofluoromethane Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002750 tryptase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- HDZZVAMISRMYHH-LITAXDCLSA-N tubercidin Chemical compound C1=CC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@@H](CO)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O HDZZVAMISRMYHH-LITAXDCLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tyrosine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241001529453 unidentified herpesvirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001430294 unidentified retrovirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000009107 upstream regulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N uracil arabinoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940045145 uridine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 208000007089 vaccinia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000024883 vasodilation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000015112 vegetable and seed oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008158 vegetable oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000002845 virion Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000011179 visual inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000012431 wafers Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000080 wetting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002424 x-ray crystallography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
- C12N9/10—Transferases (2.)
- C12N9/12—Transferases (2.) transferring phosphorus containing groups, e.g. kinases (2.7)
- C12N9/1205—Phosphotransferases with an alcohol group as acceptor (2.7.1), e.g. protein kinases
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
- A61K31/7042—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
- A61K31/7052—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
- A61K31/706—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
- A61K31/7064—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
- A61K31/7076—Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines containing purines, e.g. adenosine, adenylic acid
Definitions
- the present invention relates to compounds that modulate processes associated with isotype switching of B cells and IgE production, methods and kits for identifying such compounds and methods of using such compounds in a variety of contexts, such as for the treatment or prevention of diseases associated with or characterized by production and/or accumulation of IgE, including anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, and IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- diseases associated with or characterized by production and/or accumulation of IgE including anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, and IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and
- the immune system protects the body against invasion by foreign environmental agents such as microorganisms or their products, foods, chemicals, drugs, molds, pollen, animal hair or dander, etc.
- the ability of the immune system to protect the body against such foreign invaders may be innate or acquired.
- T-cells thymus
- B-cells bone marrow
- a third cell type that participates in the acquired immune response is the class of cells referred to as antigen-presenting cells (APC). Unlike the T- and B-cells, the APC do not have antigen-specificity. However, they play an important role in processing and presenting the antigen to the T-cells.
- APC antigen-presenting cells
- T- and B-cells are both involved in acquired immunity, they have different functions. Both T- and B-cells have antigen-specific receptors on their surfaces that, when bound by the antigen, activate the cells to release various products.
- the surface receptors are immunoglobulins and the products released by the activated B-cells are immunoglobulins that have the same specificity for the antigen as the surface receptor immunoglobulins.
- the products released are not the same as their surface receptor immunoglobulins, but are instead other molecules, called cytokines, that affect other cells and participate in the elimination of the antigen.
- cytokine released by a class of T-cells called helper T-cells, is interleukin-4 (IL-4).
- each immunoglobulin consists of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains.
- the H chains are linked together via disulfide bridges.
- the portion of the immunoglobulin that binds the antigen includes the amino-terminal regions of both L and H chains.
- H chains There are five major classes of H chains, termed ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ and ⁇ , providing five different isotypes of immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG and IgM. Although all five classes of immunoglobulins may possess precisely the same specificity for an antigen, they all have different biological functions.
- Such hypersensitivity or allergic reactions are divided into four classes, designated types I-IV.
- the symptoms of the type I allergic reactions include the common symptoms associated with mild allergies, such as runny nose, watery eyes, etc., as well as the more dangerous, and often fatal, symptoms of difficulty in breathing (asthma), asphyxiation (typically due to constriction of smooth muscle around the bronchi in the lungs) and a sharp drop in blood pressure.
- atopic reactions including atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and atopic asthma.
- IgE immunoglobulins are crucial immune mediators of such anaphylactic hypersensitivity and allergic reactions, and have been shown to be responsible for the induction and maintenance of anaphylactic allergic symptoms.
- anti-IgE antibodies have been shown to interfere with IgE function and alleviate allergic symptoms (Jardieu, 1995, Curr. Op. Immunol. 7:779-782; Shields et al., 1995, Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 107:308-312).
- release and/or accumulation of IgE immunoglobulins are believed to play a crucial role in the anaphylactic allergic response to innocuous foreign invaders.
- IgE production and/or accumulation include, but are not limited to, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies and B-cell lymphoma.
- IgEs are produced and released by B-cells, the cells must be activated to do so (B-cells initially produce only IgD and IgM).
- the isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE is a complex process that involves the replacement of certain immunoglobulin constant (C) regions with other C regions that have biologically distinct effector functions, without altering the specificity of the immunoglobulin.
- C immunoglobulin constant
- IgE switching a deletional rearrangement of the IgH chain gene locus occurs, which results in the joining of the switch region of the ⁇ gene, S ⁇ , with the corresponding region of the ⁇ gene, S ⁇ .
- This IgE switching is induced in part by IL-4 (or IL-13) produced by T-cells.
- IL-4 or IL-13
- the IL-4 induction initiates transcription through the S ⁇ region, resulting in the synthesis of germline (or “sterile”) ⁇ transcripts (that is, transcripts of the unrearranged C ⁇ H genes) that lead to the production of IgE instead of IgM.
- IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription and consequent synthesis of IgE is inhibited by interferon gamma (IFN- ⁇ ), interferon alpha (IFN- ⁇ ) and tumor growth factor beta (TGF- ⁇ ).
- IFN- ⁇ interferon gamma
- IFN- ⁇ interferon alpha
- TGF- ⁇ tumor growth factor beta
- a second signal also normally delivered by T-cells, is required for switch recombination leading to the production of IgE.
- This second T-cell signal may be replaced by monoclonal antibodies to CD40, infection by Epstein-Barr virus or hydrocortisone.
- the ability to screen for compounds capable of modulating IgE production, and in particular compounds that modulate IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ⁇ transcription typically involves screening candidate compounds in complex cell-based functional assays, such as the functional assays described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707. These assays typically involve contacting a cell comprising a reporter gene operably linked to a promoter responsive to or inducible by IL-4 with a candidate compound of interest in the presence of IL-4 and assessing the amount of reporter gene product produced.
- the reporter gene is typically a gene that encodes a protein that produces an observable signal, such as a fluorescent protein.
- the IL-4 inducible promoter may be a germline ⁇ promoter.
- AR02E8 compounds which are capable of modulating, and in particular inhibiting, the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade involved in B-cell isotype switching to, and consequent production of, IgE.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are generally 8 to 30 amino acid residue peptides or peptide analogs, or pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, characterized by structural formula (I): Z 1 ⁇ X 1 ⁇ X 2 ⁇ X 3 ⁇ X 4 ⁇ X 5 ⁇ X 6 ⁇ X 7 ⁇ X 8 ⁇ X 9 ⁇ X 10 ⁇ X 11 ⁇ X 12 ⁇ X 13 ⁇ X 14 ⁇ X 15 ⁇ X 16 ⁇ X 17 ⁇ X 18 ⁇ X 19 ⁇ X 20 ⁇ X 21 ⁇ X 22 ⁇ X 23 ⁇ Z 2
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention preferably have between 10 and 25 residues; more preferably, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention have between 12 and 23 residues. In particular, the more preferred embodiments have 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 residues.
- Particular AR02E8 compounds of the invention include:
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ⁇ transcription in cellular assays. As a consequence of this activity, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention can be used to modulate the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade involved in isotype switching to, and consequent production of, IgE.
- the AR02E8 compounds may be used to inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced IgE production as a therapeutic approach towards the treatment or prevention of diseases associated with, characterized by or caused by IgE production and/or accumulation, such as anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- the AR02E8 compound of the invention can also be used in assays to identify other compounds capable of effecting the above activities, as will be described in more detail, below.
- the AR02E8 compound of the invention In addition to their ability to inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) inducible germline ⁇ transcription, and hence IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production, the AR02E8 compound of the invention also bind adenosine kinases (AKs).
- AKs adenosine kinases
- AR02E8 compounds of the invention were found to bind human AK (hAK) in a yeast two hybrid interaction assay. Quite significantly, the ability of these AR02E8 compounds to bind the hAK in this assay correlates with their observed ability to inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ⁇ transcription.
- This significant discovery enables the ability to use an AK as a “surrogate” analyte in screening assays to identify compounds that modulate or regulate the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to the production of IgE. Since induction of the ⁇ promoter in response to IL-4 (or IL-13) is the first recognizable step necessary for isotype switching and consequent production of IgE, inhibition of IL-4 (or IL-13) induced transcription of the ⁇ promoter should prevent B-cells from switching to and/or producing IgE. This significant discovery therefore permits the ability to use an AK as a surrogate analyte in simple binding assays to identify compounds having a variety of in vitro, in vivo and ex vivo therapeutic uses.
- the invention provides methods of identifying compounds that modulate, and in particular inhibit, the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to the production of IgE.
- the methods generally comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, wherein the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being a modulator of the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to the production of IgE.
- it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding to the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- the methods comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest is an AK antagonist.
- the determination of the candidate compound as an AK antagonist can be made in addition to, or as an alternative to, determination of the ability of the candidate compound of interest to bind to an AR02E8 compound.
- the invention provides methods of identifying compounds that inhibit isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE and/or IgE production.
- the methods generally comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, wherein the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being an inhibitor of isotype switching and/or IgE production.
- it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding to the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- compounds that inhibit IgE production are identified.
- compounds that inhibit IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production are identified.
- compounds that inhibit AK-mediated IgE production are identified.
- the invention provides methods of identifying compounds that modulate, and in particular inhibit or downregulate, processes mediated by or associated with IL-4 receptor-mediated B-cell isotype switching and/or IgE production and/or accumulation.
- processes include, but are not limited to, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- the methods generally involve determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, where the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being a modulator of a process mediated by or associated with IL-4 receptor-mediated isotype switching and/or IgE production and/or accumulation. In one embodiment of the method, it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- a AR02E8 compound of the invention such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- the invention provides methods of identifying compounds useful for treating disorders associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation.
- the methods generally comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, wherein the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being useful for treating disorders associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation.
- it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- IgE diseases associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation for which therapeutic compounds may be identified according to the methods include, but are not limited to, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- the invention provides compounds identified by the various screening methods of the invention.
- compositions generally comprise a AR02E8 compound of the invention, a compound that competes for binding an AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention or a compound identified by the screening methods of the invention and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent.
- the invention provides methods of modulating, and in particular inhibiting or downregulating, the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade involved in B-cell isotype switching to produce, and/or consequent production of, IgE, or processes involved in this signal transduction cascade, such as IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ⁇ transcription.
- the method generally involves administering to a cell a compound that binds an AK in an amount effective to modulate this IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade.
- the compound inhibits IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ⁇ transcription.
- the compound inhibits AK-mediated germline ⁇ transcription.
- the method may be practiced in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo.
- the cell is administered a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS, or a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- a AR02E8 compound of the invention such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS, or a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- the invention provides methods of modulating, and in particular inhibiting or downregulating, isotype switching to IgE and/or IgE production.
- the method generally involves administering to a cell an amount of a compound that binds an AK effective to modulate isotype switching to IgE and/or IgE production.
- the method may be practiced in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo.
- the cell is administered a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS, or a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- the invention provides methods of treating or preventing diseases associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation.
- the method generally comprises administering to an animal suffering from such a disease an amount of a compound that binds an AK effective to treat or prevent the disease and/or one or more of its symptoms.
- the compound administered is a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- the compound administered is a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- IgE production and/or accumulation Diseases associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation that may be treated or prevented according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions (including food and drug allergies) and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions including food and drug allergies
- symptoms associated with such reactions allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- the method may be practiced therapeutically to treat the disease once the onset of the disease and/or its associated symptoms have already occurred, or prophylactically to prevent the onset of the disease and/or its associated symptoms.
- the methods may be practiced in veterinary contexts or in the treatment of humans.
- the invention provides kits for carrying out the various methods of the invention.
- the kit comprises an AK and a AR02E8 compound of the invention or a compound that competes for binding the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- the kit may further include additional components for carrying out the methods of the invention, such as, by way of example and not limitation, buffers, labels and/or labeling reagents and/or instructions teaching methods of using the kits.
- FIG. 1 illustrates the nucleotide sequence of a 603 bp fragment of the human germline ⁇ promoter (SEQ ID NO:11);
- FIG. 2A provides a cartoon illustrating the diphtheria toxin (DT) selection of reporter cell line A5T4;
- FIG. 2B provides a cartoon illustrating the tetracycline/doxycycline controlled peptide expression system of reporter cell line A5T4;
- FIG. 3 provides a cartoon illustrating the enrichment and screening procedure used to identify certain AR02E8 compounds of the invention
- FIG. 4 provides DNA transfer data for peptide AR02E8wt
- FIG. 5A provides a cartoon outlining a yeast two hybrid (YTH) screening assay used to identify potential binding partners or targets for peptide AR02E8wt;
- FIG. 5B provides a cartoon illustrating a yeast two hybrid (YTH) assay used to identify hAK as a binding partner or target for peptide AR02E8wt;
- FIG. 6 provides a cartoon summarizing strategies for reconfirming potential targets identified in the YTH assay depicted in FIG. 5A ;
- FIG. 7 provides interaction graphic profiles for peptide AR02E8wt and mutants derived therefrom
- FIG. 8 provides selection criteria for the interaction profiling method used to confirm hAK as a binding partner for peptide AR02E8wt;
- FIG. 9 provides weighted graphic interaction/functional profiles for peptide AR02E8wt and mutants derived therefrom.
- FIG. 10 illustrates the amino acid sequences for human adenosine kinase, isoform a (SEQ ID NO: 12) and isoform b (SEQ ID NO:13).
- the amino acid may be in either the L- or D-configuration about ⁇ -carbon (C ⁇ ).
- “Ala” designates alanine without specifying the configuration about the ⁇ -carbon
- “D-Ala” and “L-Ala” designate D-alanine and L-alanine, respectively.
- upper case letters designate amino acids in the L-configuration about the ⁇ -carbon
- lower case letters designate amino acids in the D-configuration about the ⁇ -carbon.
- “A” designates L-alanine and “a” designates D-alanine.
- nucleosides are conventional and are as follows: adenosine (A); guanosine (G); cytidine (C); thymidine (T); and uridine (U).
- A adenosine
- G guanosine
- C cytidine
- T thymidine
- U uridine
- nucleosides may be either ribonucleosides or 2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
- the nucleosides may be specified as being either ribonucleosides or 2′-deoxyribonucleosides on an individual basis or on an aggregate basis.
- the one-letter abbreviation is preceded by either a “d” or an “r,” where “d” indicates the nucleoside is a 2′-deoxyribonucleoside and “r” indicates the nucleoside is a ribonucleoside.
- “dA” designates 2′-deoxyriboadenosine
- “rA” designates riboadenosine.
- Nucleotides are abbreviated by adding a “p” to represent each phosphate, as well as whether the phosphates are attached to the 3′-position or the 5′-position of the sugar.
- pN 5′-nucleotides
- Np 3′-nucleotides
- N represents A, G, C, T or U.
- Promoter refers to a DNA regulatory region capable of initiating transcription of a downstream (3′ direction) coding sequence.
- a promoter typically includes a transcription initiation site (conveniently defined, for example, by mapping with nuclease S1) and protein binding domains responsible for binding proteins that initiate transcription.
- TGF- ⁇ Inducible Promoter refers to a promoter that initiates transcription when a cell comprising a nucleic acid molecule including such a promoter is exposed to, or contacted with, TGF- ⁇ . While not intending to be bound by any particular theory of operation, it is believed that contacting a cell comprising such a promoter with TGF- ⁇ causes the activation of a DNA-binding protein that then binds the TGF- ⁇ inducible promoter and induces transcription of coding sequences downstream of the promoter
- ⁇ promoter or a “germline ⁇ promoter” is a TGF- ⁇ inducible promoter that, when induced in a B-cell, leads to the production of IgA immunoglobulins.
- germline ⁇ promoters are well-known in the art. Such promoters may be endogenous to a cell, or alternatively, they may be engineered or exogenously supplied.
- IL-4 inducible promoter refers to a promoter that initiates transcription when a cell comprising a nucleic acid molecule including such a promoter is exposed to, or contacted with, IL-4 or IL-13. While not intending to be bound by any particular theory of operation, it is believed that contacting a cell comprising such a promoter with IL-4 (or IL-13) causes the activation of a DNA-binding protein that then binds the IL-4 inducible promoter and induces transcription of coding sequences downstream of the promoter.
- ⁇ promoter or a “germline ⁇ promoter” is an IL-4 inducible promoter that, when induced in a B-cell, leads to the production of IgE immunoglobulins.
- IL-4 inducible germline ⁇ promoters are well-known in the art. Such promoters may be endogenous to a cell or, alternatively, they may be engineered or supplied exogenously.
- a specific example of a germline ⁇ promoter is the 603 bp IL-4 inducible fragment of the human promoter depicted in FIG. 1 (SEQ ID NO:11).
- a compound that “modulates an IL-4 inducible germline ⁇ promoter” or that “modulates IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription” has the ability to change or alter expression downstream of the germline ⁇ promoter induced by IL-4 (or IL-13).
- the change in IL-4 induced downstream expression may occur at the mRNA (transcriptional) level or at the protein (translational) level.
- the change in IL-4 induced downstream expression may be monitored at the RNA level, for example by quantifying induced downstream transcription products, or at the protein level, for example by quantifying the amount or activity of induced downstream translation products.
- the compound may act to modulate the IL-4 inducible germline promoter via any mechanism of action.
- the compound may act to modulate the IL-4 inducible germline promoter by interacting with or binding a DNA binding protein involved in the IL-4 induced transcription, or by interacting with or binding the IL-4 inducible germline ⁇ promoter per se, or by interacting with or binding to a molecule that functions in the signalling cascade triggered by IL-4.
- a compound that “modulates IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production and/or accumulation” has the ability to change or alter the amount of IgE produced and/or accumulated by a B-cell activated via the IL-4 receptor with IL-4 (or IL-13 or other IL-4 receptor ligand) and, in some cases, a second signal known to cause, in combination with IL-4 (or IL-13), isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE.
- Such second signal may be, for example, anti-CD40 monoclonal antibodies (anti-CD40 mAbs), infection by Epstein-Barr virus or hydrocortisone.
- the compound may act to modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production and/or accumulation via any mechanism of action.
- the compound may act to modulate IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription, and hence isotype switching, or the compound may act to modulate IgE production and/or accumulation in an already switched cell.
- An “IL-4 induced” activity includes activity (e.g., production of IgE, transcription of germline ⁇ promoter isotype switching of B-cell) that is induced as a result of the binding of IL-4, IL-13 or other IL-4 receptor ligand to the IL-4 receptor.
- Identifying in the context of screening assays means determining whether a candidate compound unknown to possess a particular property of interest possesses the property of interest, as well as confirming that a compound thought or known to possess a particular property of interest possesses the property of interest.
- compound 1 competes for binding to an adenosine kinase with an active AR02E8 compound and a candidate compound competes for binding to the adenosine kinase with compound 1, then for purposes of the present invention, the candidate compound competes for binding with a AR02E8 compound.
- the modifiers “directly” and “indirectly” are used, where “directly” refers to competition with the stated compound and “indirectly” refers to competition with another compound that itself competes with the stated compound.
- Alkyl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a saturated or unsaturated, branched, straight-chain or cyclic monovalent hydrocarbon group having the stated number of carbon atoms (i.e., C 1 -C 6 means from one to six carbon atoms) derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent alkane, alkene or alkyne.
- Typical alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl; ethyls such as ethanyl, ethenyl, ethynyl; propyls such as propan-1-yl, propan-2-yl, cyclopropan-1-yl, prop-1-en-1-yl, prop-1-en-2-yl, prop-2-en-1-yl (allyl), cycloprop-1-en-1-yl; cycloprop-2-en-1-yl, prop-1-yn-1-yl, prop-2-yn-1-yl, etc.; butyls such as butan-1-yl, butan-2-yl, 2-methyl-propan-1-yl, 2-methyl-propan-2-yl, cyclobutan-1-yl, but-1-en-1-yl, but-1-en-2-yl, 2-methyl-prop-1-en-1-yl, but-2-en-2-yl, buta-1,
- alkyl is specifically intended to include groups having any degree or level of saturation, i.e., groups having exclusively single carbon-carbon bonds, groups having one or more double carbon-carbon bonds, groups having one or more triple carbon-carbon bonds and groups having mixtures of single, double and triple carbon-carbon bonds. Where a specific level of saturation is intended, the expressions “alkanyl,” “alkenyl,” and “alkynyl” are used. The expression “lower alkyl” refers to alkyl groups composed of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- alkanyl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a saturated branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group.
- Typical alkanyl groups include, but are not limited to, methanyl; ethanyl; propanyls such as propan-1-yl, propan-2-yl (isopropyl), cyclopropan-1-yl, etc.; butyanyls such as butan-1-yl, butan-2-yl (sec-butyl), 2-methyl-propan-1-yl (isobutyl), 2-methyl-propan-2-yl (t-butyl), cyclobutan-1-yl, etc.; and the like.
- Alkenyl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an unsaturated branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group having at least one carbon-carbon double bond derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent alkene.
- the group may be in either the cis or trans conformation about the double bond(s).
- Typical alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethenyl; propenyls such as prop-1-en-1-yl, prop-1-en-2-yl, prop-2-en-1-yl (allyl), prop-2-en-2-yl, cycloprop-1-en-1-yl; cycloprop-2-en-1-yl; butenyls such as but-1-en-1-yl, but-1-en-2-yl, 2-methyl-prop-1-en-1-yl, but-2-en-1-yl, but-2-en-1-yl, but-2-en-2-yl, buta-1,3-dien-1-yl, buta-1,3-dien-2-yl, cyclobut-1-en-1-yl, cyclobut-1-en-3-yl, cyclobuta-1,3-dien-1-yl, etc.; and the like.
- Alkynyl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an unsaturated branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent alkyne.
- Typical alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl; propynyls such as prop-1-yn-1-yl, prop-2-yn-1-yl, etc.; butynyls such as but-1-yn-1-yl, but-1-yn-3-yl, but-3-yn-1-yl, etc.; and the like.
- Parent aromatic Ring System refers to an unsaturated cyclic or polycyclic ring system having a conjugated ⁇ electron system. Specifically included within the definition of “parent aromatic ring system” are fused ring systems in which one or more of the rings are aromatic and one or more of the rings are saturated or unsaturated, such as, for example, fluorene, indane, indene, phenalene, etc.
- Typical parent aromatic ring systems include, but are not limited to, aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexylene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, trinaphthalene, and the like.
- Aryl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having the stated number of carbon ring atoms (i.e., C 5 -C 14 means from 5 to 14 carbon ring atoms) derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system.
- Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexylene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, trinaphthalene, and the like.
- the aryl group is (C 5 -C 14 ) aryl, with (C 5 -C 10 ) being even more preferred.
- Particularly preferred aryls are cyclopentadienyl, phenyl and naphthyl.
- Arylalkyl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an acyclic alkyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl group.
- Typical arylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, 2-phenylethan-1-yl, 2-phenylethen-1-yl, naphthylmethyl, 2-naphthylethan-1-yl, 2-naphthylethen-1-yl, naphthobenzyl, 2-naphthophenylethan-1-yl and the like.
- arylalkanyl arylalkenyl and/or arylalkynyl
- the arylalkyl group is (C 6 -C 16 ) arylalkyl, e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety of the arylalkyl group is (C 1 -C 6 ) and the aryl moiety is (C 5 -C 10 ).
- the arylalkyl group is (C 6 -C 13 ), e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety of the arylalkyl group is (C 1 -C 3 ) and the aryl moiety is (C 5 -C 10 ).
- Parent Heteroaromatic Ring System refers to a parent aromatic ring system in which one or more carbon atoms are each independently replaced with the same or different heteroatoms or heteroatomic groups. Typical heteroatoms or heteroatomic groups to replace the carbon atoms include, but are not limited to, N, NH, P, O, S, Si, etc. Specifically included within the definition of “parent heteroaromatic ring systems” are fused ring systems in which one or more of the rings are aromatic and one or more of the rings are saturated or unsaturated, such as, for example, arsindole, benzodioxan, benzofuran, chromane, chromene, indole, indoline, xanthene, etc.
- parent heteroaromatic ring system those recognized rings that include substituents, such as benzopyrone.
- Typical parent heteroaromatic ring systems include, but are not limited to, arsindole, benzodioxan, benzofuran, benzopyrone, carbazole, ⁇ -carboline, chromane, chromene, cinnoline, furan, imidazole, indazole, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, isothiazole, isoxazole, naphthyridine, oxadiazole, oxazole, perimidine, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phthalazine, pteridine, purine, pyran, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine
- Heteroaryl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a monovalent heteroaromatic group having the stated number of ring atoms (i.e., “5-14 membered” means from 5 to 14 ring atoms) derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single atom of a parent heteroaromatic ring system.
- Typical heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from acridine, arsindole, carbazole, ⁇ -carboline, chromane, chromene, cinnoline, furan, imidazole, indazole, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, isothiazole, isoxazole, naphthyridine, oxadiazole, oxazole, perimidine, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phthalazine, pteridine, purine, pyran, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrrole, pyrrolizine, quinazoline, quinoline, quinolizine, quinoxaline, te
- Heteroarylalkyl by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an acyclic alkyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, is replaced with a heteroaryl group. Where specific alkyl moieties are intended, the nomenclature heteroarylalkanyl, heteroarylalkenyl and/or heterorylalkynyl is used.
- the heteroarylalkyl group is a 6-20 membered heteroarylalkyl, e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety of the heteroarylalkyl is 1-6 membered and the heteroaryl moiety is a 5-14-membered heteroaryl.
- the heteroarylalkyl is a 6-13 membered heteroarylalkyl, e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety is 1-3 membered and the heteroaryl moiety is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
- Substituted Alkyl, Aryl, Arylalkyl, Heteroaryl or Heteroarylakyl refers to an alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylakyl group in which one or more hydrogen atoms is replaced with another substituent group.
- substituent groups include, but are not limited to, —OR′, —SR′, —NR′R′, —NO 2 , —NO, —CN, —CF 3 , halogen (e.g., —F, —Cl, —Br and —I), —C(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NR′, —S(O) 2 R′, —S(O) 2 NR′R′, where each R′ is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl.
- halogen e.g., —F, —Cl, —Br and —I
- R′ is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl.
- percentage of sequence identity and “percentage homology” are used interchangeably herein to refer to comparisons among polynucleotides and polypeptides, and are determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a comparison window, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
- the percentage may be calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
- the percentage may be calculated by determining the number of positions at which either the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences or a nucleic acid base or amino acid residue is aligned with a gap to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
- Those of skill in the art appreciate that there are many established algorithms available to align two sequences.
- Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the GCG Wisconsin Software Package), or by visual inspection (see generally, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, F. M.
- This algorithm involves first identifying high scoring sequence pairs (HSPs) by identifying short words of length W in the query sequence, which either match or satisfy some positive-valued threshold score T when aligned with a word of the same length in a database sequence.
- T is referred to as, the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al, supra).
- M forward score for a pair of matching residues; always >0
- N penalty score for mismatching residues; always ⁇ 0).
- a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score. Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached.
- the BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment.
- the BLASTP program uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 3, an expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff& Henikoff, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:10915 (1989)).
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are generally peptides and/or peptides analogs which, as will be discussed in more detail below, are capable of modulating a variety of processes involved in IL-4 receptor-mediated isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are generally peptides or peptide analogs, or pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, that are from 8 to 30 residues in length and include a “core” peptide or peptide analog, comprising at least 8 consecutive amino acid residues, preferably at least 10 consecutive amino acid residues, more preferably at least 12 amino acid residues, according to structural formula (II): (II) X 1 ⁇ X 2 ⁇ X 3 ⁇ X 4 ⁇ X 5 ⁇ X 6 ⁇ X 7 ⁇ X 8 ⁇ X 9 ⁇ X 10 ⁇ X 11 ⁇ X 12 ⁇ X 13 ⁇ X 14 ⁇ X 15 ⁇ X 16 ⁇ X 17 ⁇ X 18 ⁇ X 19 ⁇ X 20 ⁇ X 21 ⁇ X 22 ⁇ X 23
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include linear, branched and cyclic peptides and peptide analogs.
- AR02E8 compounds of the invention and/or the “core” peptides or peptide analogs of structure (II) are defined, in part, in terms of amino acids or residues bearing side chains belonging to certain designated classes.
- the definitions of the various classes of amino acids or residues that define structure (II), and hence the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, are as follows:
- Hydrophilic Amino Acid or Residue refers to an amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a hydrophobicity of less than zero according to the normalized consensus hydrophobicity scale of Eisenberg et al., 1984, J. Mol. Biol. 179:125-142. Genetically encoded hydrophilic amino acids include L-Thr (T), L-Ser (S), L-His (H), L-Glu (E), L-Asn (N), L-Gln (Q), L-Asp (D), L-Lys (K) and L-Arg (R).
- Acidic Amino Acid or Residue refers to a hydrophilic amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a pK value of less than about 6 when the amino acid is included in a peptide or polypeptide. Acidic amino acids typically have negatively charged side chains at physiological pH due to loss of a hydrogen ion. Genetically encoded acidic amino acids include L-Glu (E) and L-Asp (D).
- Basic Amino Acid or Residue refers to a hydrophilic amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a pK value of greater than about 6 when the amino acid is included in a peptide or polypeptide.
- Basic amino acids typically have positively charged side chains at physiological pH due to association with hydronium ion.
- Genetically encoded basic amino acids include L-His (H), L-Arg (R) and L-Lys (K).
- Poly Amino Acid or Residue refers to a hydrophilic amino acid or residue having a side chain that is uncharged at physiological pH, but which has at least one bond in which the pair of electrons shared in common by two atoms is held more closely by one of the atoms.
- Genetically encoded polar amino acids include L-Asn (N), L-Gln (Q), L-Ser (S) and L-Thr (T).
- Hydrophobic Amino Acid or Residue refers to an amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a hydrophobicity of greater than zero according to the normalized consensus hydrophobicity scale of Eisenberg et al., 1984, J. Mol. Biol. 179:125-142. Genetically encoded hydrophobic amino acids include L-Pro (P), L-Ile (I), L-Phe (F), L-Val (V), L-Leu (L), L-Trp (W), L-Met (M), L-Ala (A) and L-Tyr (Y).
- “Aromatic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophilic or hydrophobic amino acid or residue having a side chain that includes at least one aromatic or heteroaromatic ring.
- the aromatic or heteroaromatic ring may contain one or more substituents such as —OH, —OR′′, —SH, —SR′′, —CN, halogen (e.g., —F, —Cl, —Br, —I), —NO 2 , —NO, —NH 2 , —NHR′′, —NR′′R′′, —C(O)R′′, —C(O)O ⁇ , —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR′′, —C(O)NH 2 , —C(O)NHR′′, —C(O)NR′′R′′ and the like, where each R′′ is independently (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl, substituted (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl, (
- L-Phe F
- L-Tyr Y
- W L-Trp
- Non-polar Amino Acid or Residue refers to a hydrophobic amino acid or residue having a side chain that is uncharged at physiological pH and which has bonds in which the pair of electrons shared in common by two atoms is generally held equally by each of the two atoms (i.e., the side chain is not polar).
- Genetically encoded non-polar amino acids include L-Leu (L), L-Val (V), L-Ile (I), L-Met (M) and L-Ala (A).
- “Aliphatic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophobic amino acid or residue having an aliphatic hydrocarbon side chain. Genetically encoded aliphatic amino acids include L-Ala (A), L-Val (V), L-Leu (L) and L-Ile (I).
- the amino acid L-Cys (C) is unusual in that it can form disulfide bridges with other L-Cys (C) amino acids or other sulfanyl- or sulfhydryl-containing amino acids.
- the “cysteine-like residues” include cysteine and other amino acids that contain sulfhydryl moieties that are available for formation of disulfide bridges.
- the ability of L-Cys (C) (and other amino acids with —SH containing side chains) to exist in a peptide in either the reduced free —SH or oxidized disulfide-bridged form affects whether L-Cys (C) contributes net hydrophobic or hydrophilic character to a peptide.
- L-Cys (C) exhibits a hydrophobicity of 0.29 according to the normalized consensus scale of Eisenberg (Eisenberg et al., 1984, supra), it is to be understood that for purposes of the present invention L-Cys (C) is categorized as a polar hydrophilic amino acid, notwithstanding the general classifications defined above.
- the amino acid Gly (G) is also unusual in that it bears no side chain on its ⁇ -carbon and, as a consequence, contributes only a peptide bond to a particular peptide sequence. Moreover, owing to the lack of a side chain, it is the only genetically-encoded amino acid having an achiral ⁇ -carbon. Although Gly (G) exhibits a hydrophobicity of 0.48 according to the normalized consensus scale of Eisenberg (Eisenberg et al., 1984, supra), for purposes of the present invention, Gly is categorized as an aliphatic amino acid or residue.
- L-Pro (P) is also unusual. Although it is categorized herein as a hydrophobic amino acid or residue, it will typically occur in positions near the N- and/or C-termini so as not to deleteriously affect the structure of the AR02E8 compounds. However, as will be appreciated by skilled artisans, AR02E8 compounds may include L-Pro (P) or other similar “conformationally constrained” residues at internal positions.
- “Small Amino Acid or Residue” refers to an amino acid or residue having a side chain that is composed of a total three or fewer carbon and/or heteroatoms (excluding the ⁇ -carbon and hydrogens).
- the small amino acids or residues may be further categorized as aliphatic, non-polar, polar or acidic small amino acids or residues, in accordance with the above definitions.
- Genetically-encoded small amino acids include Gly, L-Ala (A), L-Val (V), L-Cys (C), L-Asn (N), L-Ser (S), L-Thr (T) and L-Asp (D).
- Hydroxyl-containing residue refers to an amino acid containing a hydroxyl (—OH) moiety. Genetically-encoded hydroxyl-containing amino acids include L-Ser (S) L-Thr (T) and L-Tyr (Y).
- the delineated category of small amino acids includes amino acids from all of the other delineated categories except the aromatic category.
- amino acids having side chains exhibiting two or more physico-chemical properties can be included in multiple categories.
- amino acid side chains having heteroaromatic moieties that include ionizable heteroatoms, such as His may exhibit both aromatic properties and basic properties, and can therefore be included in both the aromatic and basic categories.
- the appropriate classification of any amino acid or residue will be apparent to those of skill in the art, especially in light of the detailed disclosure provided herein.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are not restricted to the genetically encoded amino acids. Indeed, in addition to the genetically encoded amino acids, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be comprised, either in whole or in part, of naturally-occurring and/or synthetic non-encoded amino acids.
- non-encoded amino acids of which the cyclic compounds of the invention may be comprised include, but are not limited to: the D-enantiomers of the genetically-encoded amino acids; 2,3-diaminopropionic acid (Dpr); ⁇ -aminoisobutyric acid (Aib); ⁇ -aminohexanoic acid (Aha); ⁇ -aminovaleric acid (Ava); N-methylglycine or sarcosine (MeGly or Sar); ornithine (Orn); citrulline (Cit); t-butylalanine (Bua); t-butylglycine (Bug); N-methylisoleucine (MeIle); phenylglycine (Phg); cyclohexylalanine (Cha); norleucine (Nle); naphthylalanine (Nal); 2-chlorophenylalanine (Ocf); 3-chlorophenylalanine (M
- amino acids or residues bearing side chain protecting groups may also comprise the AR02E8 compounds of the invention.
- protected amino acids include (protecting groups listed in parentheses), but are not limited to: Arg(tos), Cys(methylbenzyl), Cys (nitropyridinesulfenyl), Glu( ⁇ -benzylester), Gln(xanthyl), Asn(N- ⁇ -xanthyl), His(bom), His(benzyl), His(tos), Lys(fmoc), Lys(tos), Ser(O-benzyl), Thr (O-benzyl) and Tyr(O-benzyl).
- Non-encoding amino acids that are conformationally constrained of which the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be composed include, but are not limited to, N-methyl amino acids (L-configuration); 1-aminocyclopent-(2 or 3)-ene-4-carboxylic acid; pipecolic acid; azetidine-3-carboxylic acid; homoproline (hPro); and 1-aminocyclopentane-3-carboxylic acid.
- TABLE 1 The classifications of the genetically encoded and certain common non-encoded amino acids according to the categories defined above are summarized in TABLE 1, below. It is to be understood that TABLE 1 is for illustrative purposes only and does not purport to be an exhaustive list of amino acids that can comprise the AR02E8 compounds of the invention. Other amino acids not specifically mentioned herein can be readily categorized based on their observed physical and chemical properties in light of the definitions provided herein.
- each “ ⁇ ” between the various X n designates a backbone constitutive linking moiety.
- each “ ⁇ ” between the various X n represents an amide or peptide linkage of the following polarity: —C(O)—NH—.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include analogs of peptides in which one or more amide or peptide linkages are replaced with a linkage other than an amide or peptide linkage, such as a substituted amide linkage, an isostere of an amide linkage, or a peptido or amide mimetic linkage.
- the term “residue” refers to the C ⁇ carbon and side chain moiety(ies) of the designated amino acid or class of amino acid.
- defining X 1 as being a “Gly residue” means that X 1 is C ⁇ H 2 .
- X 1 as being an “Ala residue” means that X 1 is C ⁇ HCH 3 in which the C ⁇ carbon is in either the D- or L-configuration. Defining X 1 as being an “A residue” means that X 1 is C ⁇ HCH 3 in which the C ⁇ carbon is in the L-configuration.
- Substituted amide linkages that may be included in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, groups of the formula —C(O)NR 2 , where R 2 is (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl, (C 5 -C 10 ) aryl, substituted (C 5 -C 10 ) aryl, (C 6 -C 16 ) arylalkyl, substituted (C 6 -C 16 ) arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl or substituted 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl.
- R 2 is (C 1 -C 6 ) alkanyl, (C 2 -C 6 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 6 ) alkynyl or phenyl.
- Isosteres of amides that may be included in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention generally include, but are not limited to, —NR 3 —SO—, —NR 3 —S(O) 2 —, —CH 2 —CH 2 —, —CH ⁇ CH— (cis and trans), —CH 2 —NH—, —CH 2 —S—, —CH 2 —O—, —C(O)—CH 2 —, —CH(OH)—CH 2 — and —CH 2 —S(O) 2 —, where R 3 is hydrogen or R 2 and R 2 is as previously defined.
- interlinkages may be included in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention in either the depicted polarity or in the reverse polarity.
- Peptide analogs including such non-amide linkages, as well as methods of synthesizing such analogs are well-known. See, for example, Spatola, 1983, “Peptide Backbone Modifications,” In: Chemistry and Biochemistry of Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins , Weinstein, Ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, pp. 267-357 (general review); Morley, 1980, Trends Pharm. Sci. 1:463-468; Hudson et al., 1979, Int. J. Prot. Res.
- one or more amide linkages may be replaced with peptidomimetic and/or amide mimetic moieties.
- Non-limiting examples of such moities are described in Olson et al., 1993, J. Med. Chem. 36:3039-3049; Ripka & Rich, 1998, Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2:441-452; Borchardt et al., 1997, Adv. Drug. Deliv. Rev. 27:235-256 and the various references cited therein.
- structure (II) contains 23 specified residue positions, it is to be understood that the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may contain fewer than 23 residues. Indeed, truncated forms of structure (II) containing as few as 8 residues that retain one or more of the utilities described herein are considered to be within the scope of the present invention. Truncated forms of the compounds of structure (II) are obtained by deleting one or more residues from either or both termini. Preferred truncated forms of structure (II) will contain at least 10 residues; more preferred truncated forms of structure (II) will contain at least 12 to at least 16 residues.
- the core peptides or peptide analogs of structure (II) may also be extended at one or both termini. Typically, such extensions will range from about 1 to about 5 residues, but may be even longer, so long as the compound retains one or more of the utilities described herein. For example, one or both termini may be extended by 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or even more residues.
- the extension has a sequence that corresponds to a sequence of a signal peptide capable of effecting transport across membranes, such that the AR02E8 compound is a “fusion polypeptide.”
- fusion polypeptides are particularly advantageous for administering to cells AR02E8 compounds of the invention that may not readily traverse cell membranes.
- the signal sequence may be fused to either the N-terminal or C-terminal portion of the AR02E8 compound, depending upon the characteristics of the particular signal sequence selected. Signal sequences capable of transporting molecules into cells are well-known in the art. Any of these sequences may be used in connection with the AR02E8 compounds of the invention.
- HIV Tat sequences see, e.g., Fawell et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:664; Frankel et al., 1988, Cell 55:1189; Savion et al., 1981, J. Biol. Chem. 256:1149; Derossi et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:10444; Baldin et al., 1990, EMBO J. 9:1511; U.S. Pat. No. 5,804,604; U.S. Pat. No. 5,670,617; and U.S. Pat. No.
- the terminus of the AR02E8 compounds of the invention corresponding to the amino terminus, if present, may be in the “free” form (e.g., H 2 N—), or alternatively may be acylated with a group of the formula R 2 C(O)— or R 2 S(O) 2 —, wherein R 2 is as previously defined.
- R 2 is selected from the group consisting of (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl, (C 5 -C 10 ) aryl, (C 6 -C 16 ) arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl.
- the R 2 group is a group that facilitates entry of the AR02E8 compound into a cell. Such groups are well-known in the art.
- the amino terminus may be “blocked” with a blocking group designed to impart the AR02E8 compound with specified properties, such as a low antigenicity.
- blocking groups include polyalkylene oxide polymers such as polyethylene glycol (PEG).
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- a variety of polymers useful for imparting compounds, and in particular peptides and proteins, with specified properties are known in the art, as are chemistries suitable for attaching such polymers to the compounds. Specific non-limiting examples may be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,643,575; 5,730,990; 5,902,588; 5,919,455; 6,113,906; 6,153,655; and 6,177,087, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- transport-effecting, acylating and/or blocking groups may also be attached to a side chain moiety of a AR02E8 compound.
- Residues having appropriate functionalities for attaching such groups will be apparent to those of skill in the art, and include, by way of example and not limitation, Cys, Lys, Asp and Glu.
- the terminus of the AR02E8 compounds corresponding to the C-terminus may be in the form of an underivatized carboxyl group, either as the free acid or as a salt, such as a sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium salt or other salt of an inorganic or organic ion, or may be in the form of a derivatized carboxyl, such as an ester, thioester or amide.
- Such derivatized forms of the compounds may be prepared by reacting a AR02E8 compound having a carboxyl terminus with an appropriate alcohol, thiol or amine.
- Suitable alcohols, thiols or amines include, by way of example and not limitation, alcohols of the formula R 2 OH, thiols of the formula R 2 SH and amines of the formula R 2 NH 2 , R 2 R 2 NH or NH 3 , where each R 2 is, independently of the others, as previously defined.
- the C-terminus may also include transport-effecting or other blocking groups, such as those described above.
- the various X n residues comprising the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be in either the L- or D-configuration about their C ⁇ carbons. In one embodiment, all of the C ⁇ carbons of a particular AR02E8 compound are in the same configuration. In some embodiments of the invention, the AR02E8 compounds comprise specific chiralities about one or more C ⁇ carbon(s) and/or include non-peptide linkages at specified locations so as to impart the AR02E8 compound with specified properties. For example, it is well-known that peptides composed in whole or in part of D-amino acids are more resistant to proteases than their corresponding L-peptide counterparts.
- the AR02E8 compounds are peptides composed in whole or in part of D-amino acids.
- AR02E8 compounds having good stability against proteases may include peptide analogs including peptide linkages of reversed polarity at specified positions.
- AR02E8 compounds having stability against tryptic-like proteases include peptide analogs having peptide linkages of reversed polarity before each L-Arg or L-Lys residue;
- AR02E8 compounds having stability against chymotrypsin-like proteases include peptide analogs having peptide linkages of reversed polarity before each small and medium-sized L-aliphatic residue or L-non-polar residue.
- AR02E8 compounds having stability against proteases include peptide analogs composed wholly of peptide bonds of reversed polarity. Other embodiments having stability against proteases will be apparent to those of skill in the art. Additional specific embodiments of the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are described below.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention can be in a linear form or a cyclic form, with or without branching.
- the cyclic forms can be cyclized via the terminal groups or via side chain groups on internal or terminal residues, through covalent or non-covalent linkages. Additional linking groups may also be present to facilitate cyclization.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are 23-residue peptides or peptide analogs according to structural formula (III): (III) Z 1 ⁇ X 1 ⁇ X 2 ⁇ X 3 ⁇ X 4 ⁇ X 5 ⁇ X 6 ⁇ X 7 ⁇ X 8 ⁇ X 9 ⁇ X 10 ⁇ X 11 ⁇ X 12 ⁇ X 13 ⁇ X 14 ⁇ X 15 ⁇ X 16 ⁇ X 17 ⁇ X 18 ⁇ X 19 ⁇ X 20 ⁇ X 21 ⁇ X 22 ⁇ X 23 ⁇ Z 4 wherein:
- each X 1 through X 23 is as previously defined for structure (II);
- Z 3 is H 2 N—, R 4 HN— or R 4 C(O)NH—;
- Z 4 is —C(O)O ⁇ , —C(O)OR 4 , —C(O)NHR 4 or —C(O)NH 2 ;
- each R 4 is independently (C 1 -C 6 ) alkyl or (C 1 -C 6 ) alkanyl; each “ ⁇ ” is independently an amide linkage, a substituted amide linkage or an isostere of an amide linkage; and
- each “ ⁇ ” represents a bond
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are compounds according to structural formula (III) in which each “ ⁇ ” is an amide linkage.
- AR02E8 compounds of the invention are compounds according to structural formula (III) in which:
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include compounds according to structural formula IV, and variants of such compounds of formula IV in which 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the amino acids set forth in formula IV, preferably one or two of the amino acid residues set forth in IV, are replaced by another amino acid selected from the same class (as described herein) as the original amino acid or by an Ala or a Gly residue: (IV) Z 1 -D ⁇ T ⁇ M ⁇ Q ⁇ V ⁇ Q ⁇ C ⁇ G ⁇ V ⁇ C ⁇ R ⁇ S ⁇ G ⁇ Y ⁇ V ⁇ V ⁇ A ⁇ F ⁇ W ⁇ D ⁇ V ⁇ G ⁇ P- Z 2
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are selected from the group consisting of DTMQVQCGVCRSGYVVAFWDVGP (SEQ ID NO:1), DTMQVQCGAGRSGYVVAFWDVGP (SEQ ID NO:2), DTMQVQCGVCAGGYVVAFWDVGP (SEQ ID NO:3), and analogs and protease-resistant analogs thereof.
- Active AR02E8 compounds of the invention are those that modulate, and in particular inhibit or downregulate, IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation and/or processes associated therewith.
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be assessed for such activity in any standard assay that assesses the ability of a compound to modulate IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation.
- a AR02E8 compound of the invention may be administered to a human or animal B-cell (e.g, primary B cells from blood, tonsils, spleens and other lymphoid tissues) stimulated with IL-4 (available from Pharmingen, Hamburg, Germany) and anti-CD40 mAbs (available from Ancell Corporation, Bayport Minn.) and the amount of IgE produced measured, for example, by an ELISA technique, such as the ELISA technique described in Worm et al., 1998, Blood 92:1713.
- the ELISA technique can use, for example, murine anti human IgE, biotinylated anti human IgE and streptavidin biotinylated horseradish peroxidase complex.
- Specific ELISA assays and techniques that may be used are provided in the Examples section.
- Particular active AR02E8 compounds include without limitation AR02E8wt, AR02E8VC and AR02E8RS.
- the compound may be administered to the cell by contacting the cell with the compound.
- AR02E8 compounds composed wholly of genetically-encoded amino acids that do not readily traverse cell membranes may be administered to the cell using well-known delivery techniques.
- such AR02E8 compounds may be administered using well-known retroviral vectors and infection techniques pioneered by Richard Mulligan and David Baltimore with Psi-2 lines and analogous retroviral packaging systems based upon NIH 3T3 cells (see Mann et al., 1993, Cell 33:153-159, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference).
- helper-defective packaging cell lines are capable of producing all of the necessary trans proteins (gag, pol and env) required for packaging, processing, reverse transcribing and integrating genomes.
- Those RNA molecules that have in cis the ⁇ packaging signal are packaged into maturing retrovirions.
- Virtually any of the art-known retroviral vectors and/or transfection systems may be used. Specific non-limiting examples of suitable transfection systems include those described in WO 97/27213; WO 97/27212; Choate et al., 1996, Human Gene Therapy 7:2247-2253; Kinsella et al., 1996, Human Gene Therapy 7:1405-1413; Hofmann et al, 1996, Proc. Natl. Acac. Sci.
- retroviral vector systems include vectors based upon murine stem cell virus (MSCV) as described in Hawley et al., 1994, Gene Therapy 1:136-138; vectors based upon a modified MFG virus as described in Rivere et al., 1995, Genetics 92:6733; pBABE as described in WO 97/27213 and WO 97/27212; and the vectors depicted in FIG. 11 of WO 01/34806, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- MSCV murine stem cell virus
- pBABE as described in WO 97/27213 and WO 97/27212
- FIG. 11 of WO 01/34806 the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Other suitable vectors and/or transfection techniques are discussed in connection with gene therapy administration, infra.
- a specific assay for assessing IL-4 induced IgE production that may be used to assay AR02E8 compounds of the invention is described in Worm et al., 2001, Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 124:233-236.
- a AR02E8 compound modulates IL-4 induced IgE production if it yields an increase or decrease in measured IgE levels of at least about 25% as compared to control cells (i.e., cells activated with IL-4+ anti-CD40 Mabs but not exposed to the AR02E8 compound).
- AR02E8 compounds that increase IL-4 induced IgE production are IgE agonists whereas AR02E8 compounds that decrease IL-4 induced IgE production are IgE antagonists.
- AR02E8 compounds that inhibit greater levels of IL-4 induced IgE production are particularly desirable.
- compounds that inhibit at least about 25% of IL-4 induced IgE production as compared to control cells are active, compounds that inhibit at least about 50%, 75% or even more IL-4 induced IgE production as compared to control cells are preferred.
- AR02E8 compounds may be assayed for the ability to modulate IL-4 induced transcription of a germline promoter.
- assays involve administering a AR02E8 compound to an IL-4 induced cell comprising an IL-4 inducible germline ⁇ promoter and assessing the amount of gene expression (i.e. transcription) downstream of the ⁇ promoter.
- the AR02E8 compound may be administered to the cell by contacting the cell with the compound or (for peptide compounds) via the retroviral transfection techniques described supra.
- the amount of the downstream gene expression may be assessed at the mRNA level, for example by quantifying the amount of a downstream transcription product produced, or at the translation level, for example by quantifying the amount of a downstream translation product produced.
- the germline ⁇ promoter is operably linked to a reporter gene that encodes a protein that produces an observable and/or detectable signal, such as a fluorescent protein.
- suitable assays for assessing AR02E8 compounds for the ability to modulate germline ⁇ transcription are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707, WO 01/34806, WO 99/58663, commonly owned copending application Ser. No. 09/712,821, filed Nov. 13, 2000 and commonly owned copending application Ser. No.
- a AR02E8 compound modulates germline ⁇ transcription if it yields an increase or decrease in measured downstream expression of at least about 25% as compared to control cells activated with IL-4 but not exposed to the AR02E8 compound.
- AR02E8 compounds that increase downstream expression are IL-4 agonists, whereas compounds that decrease (i.e. inhibit) downstream expression are IL-4 antagonists.
- Skilled artisans will appreciate that AR02E8 compounds that inhibit greater levels of IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription, for example on the order of 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or even more as compared to control cells, are particularly desirable.
- active AR02E8 compounds are those that exhibit a reporter ratio of ⁇ 1.1 in the A5T4 reporter line screening assay described in the examples section.
- reporter ratio is the ratio of the signal from a reporter under control of the ⁇ promoter in the absence of a AR02E8 compound to that in the presence of the AR02E8 compound.
- the reporter ratio can be determined from the ratio of the GFP fluorescence of IL-4 stimulated cells in the presence of doxycycline or tetracycline (i.e., when expression of the peptide is repressed) to the GFP fluorescence of IL-4 stimulated cells in the absence of doxycycline or tetracycline.
- B-cells initially produce IgD and IgM immunoglobulins and, when induced by the proper cytokines, produce IgEs.
- B-cells can be induced to produce other types of immunoglobulins, such as IgGs and IgAs, as well.
- IgGs immunoglobulins
- IgA immunoglobulins
- the AR02E8 compounds specifically modulate IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription or IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation.
- specific is meant that the AR02E8 compound modulates IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation or IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription but does not significantly affect the production and/or accumulation of another immunoglobulin, or transcription of the promoter of another Ig isotype.
- an AR02E8 compound specifically inhibits IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription or IL-4 induced IgE production or accumulation.
- Such AR02E8 compound does not significantly inhibit production and/or accumulation of another Ig isotype, or transcription of another Ig isotype promoter, if the observed inhibition of the other Ig isotype in an appropriate assay is on the order of 10% or less as compared to control cells.
- Such specificity may be with respect to a single Ig isotype, or may be with respect to one or more Ig isotypes.
- a AR02E8 compound may be assessed for specificity by assaying its ability to inhibit, for example, IgA production and/or accumulation or to inhibit germline ⁇ transcription in assays similar to those described above, except that the cells are activated with effectors suitable for IgA switching and synthesis and amount of IgA produced or the amount of expression downstream of a germline ⁇ promoter is assessed.
- Specific, non-limiting examples of AR02E8 compounds that specifically inhibit IL-4 induced IgE production and/or IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription include peptides AR02E8wt, AR02E8RS and AR02E8VC.
- AR02E8 compounds may also be assessed for activity based upon their ability to bind an AK using, for example, any of the AK binding assays described infra.
- active AR02E8 compounds are those having a binding constant (Kd) on the order of 10 mM or less, with Kds in the range of 100 ⁇ M, 10 ⁇ M, 1 ⁇ M, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower, being preferred.
- active AR02E8 compounds are those that compete for binding an AK with another active AR02E8 compound.
- the AR02E8 compound competes for binding an AK with peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS or peptide AR02E8VC.
- the ability of a AR02E8 compound to compete for binding an AK with another AR02E8 compound may be assessed using conventional competitive binding assay techniques.
- active AR02E8 compounds are those that exhibit an IC 50 in the range of 1 mM or lower, with IC 50 s in the range of 100 ⁇ M, 10 ⁇ M, 1 ⁇ M, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower, in such competitive binding assays being preferred.
- AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be prepared using standard techniques of organic synthesis.
- AR02E8 compounds that are peptides may be prepared using conventional step-wise solution or solid phase synthesis (see, e.g., Chemical Approaches to the Synthesis of Peptides and Proteins , Williams et al., Eds., 1997, CRC Press, Boca Raton Fla., and references cited therein; FMOC Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis: A Practical Approach , Chan & White, Eds., 2000, IRL Press, Oxford, England, and references cited therein).
- AR02E8 compounds may be prepared by way of segment condensation, as described, for example, in Liu et al., 1996, Tetrahedron Lett. 37(7):933-936; Baca et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:1881-1887; Tam et al., 1995, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 45:209-216; Schnolzer and Kent, 1992, Science 256:221-225; Liu and Tam, 1994, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 116(10):4149-4153; Liu and Tam, 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:6584-6588; Yamashiro and Li, 1988, Int.
- AR02E8 compounds containing N- and/or C-terminal blocking groups can be prepared using standard techniques of organic chemistry. For example, methods for acylating the N-terminus of a peptide or amidating or esterifying the C-terminus of a peptide are well-known in the art. Modes of carrying other modifications at the N- and/or C-terminus will be apparent to those of skill in the art, as will modes of protecting any side-chain functionalities as may be necessary to attach terminal blocking groups.
- Formation of disulfide linkages is generally conducted in the presence of mild oxidizing agents. Chemical oxidizing agents may be used, or the compounds may simply be exposed to atmospheric oxygen to effect these linkages.
- oxidizing agents may be used, or the compounds may simply be exposed to atmospheric oxygen to effect these linkages.
- Various methods are known in the art, including those described, for example, by Tam et al, 1979, Synthesis 955-957; Stewart et al., 1984, Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, 2d Ed., Pierce Chemical Company Rockford, Ill.; Ahmed et al., 1975, J. Biol. Chem. 250:8477-8482; and Pennington et al., 1991 Peptides 1990 164-166, Giralt and Andreu, Eds., ESCOM Leiden, The Netherlands.
- Cyclic peptides may be prepared or may result from the formation of single or multiple disulfide bonds, other side-chains or head-to-tail cyclizations, either directly or by way of an optional linker.
- the cyclic peptides may be prepared using any art-known techniques for the preparation of cyclic peptides and cyclic peptide analogs.
- the peptide or peptide analog may be prepared in linear or non-cyclized form using conventional solution or solid phase peptide and/or peptide analog syntheses and cyclized using standard chemistries.
- the linear polypeptides can be cyclized with a linking group between the two termini, between one terminus and the side chain of an amino acid in the peptide or peptide derivative, or between the side chains to two amino acids in the peptide or peptide derivative.
- Suitable procedures for synthesizing the peptide and peptide analogs described herein, as well as suitable chemistries for cyclizing such compounds, are well known in the art.
- the AR02E8 compound is composed entirely of genetically-encoded amino acids, or a portion of it is so composed, the peptide or the relevant portion may also be synthesized using conventional recombinant genetic engineering techniques.
- a polynucleotide sequence encoding the peptide is inserted into an appropriate expression vehicle, i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence, or in the case of an RNA viral vector, the necessary elements for replication and translation.
- an appropriate expression vehicle i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence, or in the case of an RNA viral vector, the necessary elements for replication and translation.
- the expression vehicle is then transfected into a suitable target cell which will express the peptide.
- the expressed peptide is then isolated by procedures well-established in the art.
- the polynucleotide can be designed to encode multiple units of the peptide separated by enzymatic cleavage sites—either homopolymers (repeating peptide units) or heteropolymers (different peptides strung together) can be engineered in this way.
- the resulting polypeptide can be cleaved (e.g., by treatment with the appropriate enzyme) in order to recover the peptide units. This can increase the yield of peptides driven by a single promoter.
- a polycistronic polynucleotide can be designed so that a single mRNA is transcribed which encodes multiple peptides (i.e., homopolymers or heteropolymers) each coding region operatively linked to a cap-independent translation control sequence; e.g., an internal ribosome entry site (IRES).
- a cap-independent translation control sequence e.g., an internal ribosome entry site (IRES).
- IRES internal ribosome entry site
- the polycistronic construct directs the transcription of a single, large polycistronic mRNA which, in turn, directs the translation of multiple, individual peptides. This approach eliminates the production and enzymatic processing of polyproteins and may significantly increase yield of peptide driven by a single promoter.
- Polynucleotides capable of generating or expressing certain cyclic peptide embodiments of the compounds of the invention may be prepared in vitro and/or in vivo.
- Polypeptides may be prepared from polynucleotides to generate or express the cyclic peptides utilizing the trans splicing ability of split inteins. Methods for making such polynucleotides to yield cyclic peptides are known in the art and are described, for example, in WO 01/66565, WO 00/36093; U.S. Patent Application No. 60/358,827, entitled “Cyclic Peptides and Analogs Useful to Treat Allergies”, filed on 21 Feb. 2002, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the peptides described herein. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA or plasmid DNA expression vectors containing an appropriate coding sequence; yeast or filamentous fungi transformed with recombinant yeast or fungi expression vectors containing an appropriate coding sequence; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing an appropriate coding sequence; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus or tobacco mosaic virus) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing an appropriate coding sequence; or animal cell systems.
- microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA or plasmid DNA expression vectors containing an appropriate coding sequence; yeast or filamentous fungi transformed with recomb
- the expression elements of the expression systems vary in their strength and specificities.
- any of a number of suitable transcription and translation elements may be used in the expression vector.
- inducible promoters such as pL of bacteriophage lambda, plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used;
- promoters such as the baculovirus polyhedron promoter may be used;
- promoters derived from the genome of plant cells e.g., heat shock promoters; the promoter for the small subunit of RUBISCO; the promoter for the chlorophyll a/b binding protein
- plant viruses e.g., the 35S RNA promoter of CaMV; the coat protein promoter of TMV
- sequences encoding the peptides of the invention may be driven by any of a number of promoters.
- viral promoters such as the 35S RNA and 19S RNA promoters of CaMV (Brisson et al., 1984, Nature 310:511-514), or the coat protein promoter of TMV (Takamatsu et al., 1987, EMBO J. 3:1311) may be used; alternatively, plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO (Coruzzi et al., 1984, EMBO J.
- Autographa californica nuclear polyhidrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express the foreign genes.
- the virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells.
- a coding sequence may be cloned into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedron gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example, the polyhedron promoter). Successful insertion of a coding sequence will result in inactivation of the polyhedron gene and production of non-occluded recombinant virus (i.e., virus lacking the proteinaceous coat coded for by the polyhedron gene).
- a number of viral based expression systems may be utilized.
- a coding sequence may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence.
- This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region E1 or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing peptide in infected hosts. (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, 1984, Proc. Natl.
- the vaccinia 7.5 K promoter may be used, (see, e.g., Mackett et al., 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 79:7415-7419; Mackett et al., 1984, J. Virol. 49:857-864; Panicali et al., 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 79:4927-4931).
- the AR02E8 compounds of the invention can be purified by art-known techniques such as reverse phase chromatography high performance liquid chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, gel electrophoresis, affinity chromatography and the like.
- the actual conditions used to purify a particular compound will depend, in part, on synthesis strategy and on factors such as net charge, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, etc., and will be apparent to those having skill in the art.
- any antibody which specifically binds the compound may be used.
- various host animals including but not limited to rabbits, mice, rats, etc., may be immunized by injection with a compound.
- the compound may be attached to a suitable carrier, such as BSA, by means of a side chain functional group or linkers attached to a side chain functional group.
- adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, including but not limited to Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacilli Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum.
- BCG Bacilli Calmette-Guerin
- Corynebacterium parvum bacilli Calmette-Guerin
- Monoclonal antibodies to a compound may be prepared using any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These include, but are not limited to, the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler & Milstein, 1975, Nature 256:495-497 and/or Kaprowski, U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,110; the human B-cell hybridoma technique described by Kosbor et al., 1983, Immunology Today 4:72 and/or Cote et al., 1983, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80:2026-2030; and the EBV-hybridoma technique described by Cole et al., 1985, Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R.
- humanized antibodies can be prepared (see, e.g., Queen, U.S. Pat. No. 5,585,089).
- techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778, can be adapted to produce compound-specific single chain antibodies.
- Antibody fragments which contain deletions of specific binding sites may be generated by known techniques.
- such fragments include but are not limited to F(ab′)2 fragments, which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule and Fab fragments, which can be generated by reducing the disulfide bridges of the F(ab′)2 fragments.
- Fab expression libraries may be constructed (Huse et al., 1989, Science 246:1275-1281) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab fragments with the desired specificity for the peptide of interest.
- the antibody or antibody fragment specific for the desired peptide can be attached, for example, to agarose, and the antibody-agarose complex is used in immunochromatography to purify peptides of the invention. See, Scopes, 1984, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice, Springer-Verlag New York, Inc., N.Y., Livingstone, 1974, Methods In Enzymology: Immunoaffinity Chromatography of Proteins 34:723-731.
- anti-AK antibodies may be used in the various methods described herein, for example, to inhibit IL-4 induced isotype switching and/or IgE production and/or to inhibit IL-4 induced germline transcription. Such antibodies may also be used in the various therapeutic methods described herein.
- the present inventors have discovered that the IgE regulatory effects of three AR02E8 compounds of the invention, peptides AR02E8wt, AR02E8RS and AR02E8VC, are mediated by a adenosine kinase (AK). Specifically, the present inventors have discovered that these three AR02E8 compounds bind a human AK in yeast two hybrid (YTH) assays in a manner that correlates with their ability to inhibit IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription in in vitro cellular assays.
- AK adenosine kinase
- Adenosine an endogenous modulator of intercellular signaling that reduces cell excitability during stress and trauma, is known to effect myriad biological functions.
- adenosine inhibits the release of certain neurotransmitters in the CNS (Corradetti et al., 1984, Eur. J. Pharmacol. 104:19-26), stabilizes membrane potential (Rudolphi et al., 1992, Cerebrovasc. Brain Metab. Rev. 4:346-360), exhibits anticonvulsant properties (Dragunow, 1986, Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 7:128-130), exhibits neuroprotectant properties (Rudolphi et al., 1992, Trends Pharmacol. Sci.
- adenosine inhibits certain neutrophil functions and exhibits anti-inflammatory effects (Cronstein, 1994, J. Appln. Physiol. 76:5-13). Adenosine is believed to effect these physiological functions by interacting with specific extracellular G-protein coupled receptors which regulate membrane cation flux, membrane polarisation and the release of excitatory neurotransmitters.
- Adenosine kinase is a key cytosolic enzyme that regulates intra- and extracellular concentrations of adenosine.
- at least two AK isoforms are known, which isoforms are the result of alternate splicing.
- Isoform a the short form, has 345 amino acids; isoform b, the long form has 362 amino acids.
- Isoform a and isoform b differ at only at the amino terminal where the first 4 residues of isoform a are replaced by the first 21 residues of isoform b.
- the amino acid sequences of human AK isoform a (SEQ ID NO:12) and human AK isoform b (SEQ ID NO:13) are shown in FIG. 10 .
- Adenosine kinase phosphorylates adenosine to produce AMP.
- Adenosine kinase is one of two enzymes responsible for adenosine metabolism. Adenosine deaminase also contributes to adenosine metabolism (by deaminating Ad to produce inosine), but AK appears to predominate in vivo. Inhibition of adenosine kinase potentiates local cellular adenosine levels at cell and tissue sites that are undergoing accelerated adenosine release. Adenosine kinase is also responsible for the activation of many pharmacologically active nucleosides (Miller et al., 1979, J.
- Inhibitors of adenosine kinase have demonstrated efficacy in animal models of epilepsy, cerebral ischemia, pain and inflammation (Kowulak and Jarvis, 2000, supra). Recently, a specific inhibitor of adenosine kinase, GP515, has been shown to improve experimental colitis in mice (Siegmund et al., 2001, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 296:99-105). Other AK inhibitors are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,646,128 and 5,864,033.
- adenosine kinase has been recognized as an important therapeutic target for a variety of disorders
- the present inventors are the first to discover a link between adenosine kinase and modulation of the IL-4 signaling cascade involved in the production of IgE, and in particular to IL-4 induced isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE.
- an AK as a “surrogate” analyte in simple binding assays to screen for and/or identify compounds involved in IL-4 induced IgE regulation.
- Such compounds are useful in the treatment and/or prevention of diseases caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, such as anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- diseases caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation such as anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic derma
- the invention also provides methods and kits useful for identifying compounds having specified utilities.
- the methods and kits may be used to identify compounds that inhibit IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation, compounds that inhibit IL-4 induced isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE, compounds that inhibit IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription, and/or compounds useful to treat or prevent diseases caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, such as those described above.
- useful AKs includes human AK isoform a or isoform b, and allelic and species variants thereof, as well as fragments and fusion proteins thereof, that bind to the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, particularly peptide AR02E8wt.
- such proteins will have polypeptide sequences that share at least about 80% identity with one of the known isotypes of AKs, particularly human AK isoform a or isoform b.
- AK proteins useful in the screening methods are those that bind the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, in particular, peptide AR02E8 wt.
- the AK protein employed in the methods of the present invention will have at least 85%, 90%, 95% or even higher % identity with one of the known isotypes of AKs, measured as indicated above.
- Specific examples of AKs suitable for use in the methods and kits of the invention include AKs derived from humans (“hAK”), for example human isoform a (NP — 001114/gi:4501943, McNally et al. (1997)), human isoform b (NP-NP — 006712/gi:5921990, McNally et al.
- mutants and/or fragments of an AK may also be used in the assays and kits of the invention.
- Mutants and/or fragments of AK that are useful in this regard are those mutants and/or fragments that retain the ability to bind an active AR02E8 compound of the invention, preferably peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS or peptide AR02E8VC.
- Suitable fragments include AKs that are truncated at the N- and/or C-terminus by one or more amino acids, typically by about 1 to 10-20 amino acids, although fragments truncated by more amino acids may be used, provided the fragments bind an active AR02E8 compound.
- mutants and/or fragments of AK that substantially retain one or more of the biological activities of AK are useful in the assays and kits of the invention.
- substantially retain is meant that the mutant or fragment has at least 10% of the biological activity of AK as measured by any conventional assay of AK activity; preferably, the mutant or fragment has at least 50% of the biological activity of AK.
- AK mutants useful in the methods and kits of the invention include conservative mutants in which one or more amino acids is replaced with another amino acid of the same category, as defined above.
- AK mutants including non-conservative substitutions may also be used, so long as the particular mutant binds an active AR02E8 compound and/or retains AK activity.
- the expression “adenosine kinase” or “AK” as used herein specifically includes such mutants and/or fragments in addition to the full-length wild-type proteins.
- the AKs may be obtained using conventional recombinant and purification techniques or may be isolated directly from the natural source.
- any of the recombinant techniques discussed supra in connection with the AR02E8 compounds may be used to produce an AK suitable for use in methods and kits of the invention.
- Such recombinantly-produced AKs may be isolated using affinity chromatography (for example with an anti-AK antibody or AMP-sepharose) or other conventional techniques.
- affinity chromatography for example with an anti-AK antibody or AMP-sepharose
- Specific examples that may be routinely adapted are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,294 and Spychala et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (1996) 93:1232), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Other techniques for obtaining AKs for use in the methods and kits of the invention will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- the compounds screened can range from small organic molecules to large polymers and biopolymers, and can include, by way of example and not limitation, small organic compounds, saccharides, carbohydrates, polysaccharides, lectins, peptides and analogs thereof, polypeptides, proteins, antibodies, oligonucleotides, polynucleotides, nucleic acids, etc.
- the candidate compounds screened are small organic molecules having a molecular weight in the range of about 100-2500 daltons.
- candidate molecules will often comprise cyclical structures composed of carbon atoms or mixtures of carbon atoms and one or more heteroatoms and/or aromatic, polyaromatic, heteroaromatic and/or polyaromatic structures.
- the candidate agents may include a wide variety of functional group substituents.
- the substituent(s) are independently selected from the group of substituents known to interact with proteins, such as, for example, amine, carbonyl, hydroxyl and carboxyl groups.
- the candidate compounds may be screened on a compound-by-compound basis or, alternatively, using one of the myriad library techniques commonly employed in the art.
- synthetic combinatorial compound libraries, natural products libraries and/or peptide libraries may be screened using the assays of the invention to identify compounds that bind an AK.
- the candidate compounds may be assessed for the ability to bind an AK per se, or they may be assessed for the ability to competitively bind an AK in the presence of an active AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS, or peptide AR02E8VC, or another compound that competitively binds an AK in the presence of an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- These competitive binding assays can identify compounds that bind the AK at approximately the same site as the active AR02E8 compound.
- Myriad techniques for carrying out competitive binding assays are known in the art. Any of these techniques may be employed in the present invention.
- Such binding experiments may be conducted wholly in solution or, alternatively, either the AK or the candidate compound may be immobilized on a solid support.
- the AK or the candidate compound may be attached to a glass or other bead or a solid surface such as, for example, the bottom of a petri dish.
- the immobilization may be mediated by non-covalent interactions or by covalent interactions.
- Methods for immobilizing myriad types of compounds and proteins on solid supports are well-known. Any of these methods may be used to immobilize the AK and/or candidate compound on solid supports.
- the binding assays may employ a purified AK or, alternatively, the assays may be carried out with nucleosol and/or cytosol fractions from cells that express the AK, either endogenously or recombinantly.
- a suitable method for carrying out binding assays with cellular lysates of E. coli cells engineered to express an AK is described in Spychala et al. (1996, supra) and the references cited therein, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the AK and candidate compound are typically contacted with one another under conditions conducive to binding. Although the actual conditions used can vary, typically the binding assays are carried out under physiological conditions. The concentrations of AK and candidate compound used will depend upon, among other factors, whether the AK or candidate compound is immobilized or free in solution, the binding affinities of candidate compounds, etc. Actual concentrations suitable for a particular assay will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- kits and assays of the invention it may be convenient to employ a labeled AK and/or labeled candidate compound.
- binding is assessed by contacting an immobilized candidate compound with a labeled AK and assaying for the presence of immobilized label.
- the label may be a direct label, i.e., a label that itself is detectable or produces a detectable signal, or it may be an indirect label, i.e., a label that is detectable or produces a detectable signal in the presence of another compound.
- the method of detection will depend upon the labeled used, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- Suitable direct labels include radiolabels, fluorophores, chromophores, chelating agents, particles, chemiluminescent agents and the like.
- Suitable radiolabels include, by way of example and not limitation, 3 H, 14 C, 32 P, 35 S, 36 Cl, 57 Co, 58 Co, 59 Fe, 90 Y, 125 I, 131 I and 186 Re.
- Suitable fluorophores include, by way of example and not limitation, fluorescein, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, Texas red, free or chelated lanthanide series salts such as Eu 3+ and the myriad fluorophores available from Molecular Probes Inc., Eugene, Oreg.
- suitable colored labels include, by way of example and not limitation, metallic sol particles, for example, gold sol particles such as those described by Leuvering (U.S. Pat. No. 4,313,734); dye sole particles such as described by Gribnau et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,373,932) and May et al. (WO 88/08534); dyed latex such as those described Snyder (EP 0 280 559 and 0 281 327) and dyes encapsulated in liposomes as described by Campbell et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,703,017).
- metallic sol particles for example, gold sol particles such as those described by Leuvering (U.S. Pat. No. 4,313,734)
- dye sole particles such as described by Gribnau et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,373,932) and May et al. (WO 88/08534)
- dyed latex such as those described Snyder (EP 0 280 559 and
- Suitable indirect labels include enzymes capable of reacting with or interacting with a substrate to produce a detectable signal (such as those used in ELISA and EMIT immunoassays), ligands capable of binding a labeled moiety, and the like.
- Suitable enzymes useful as indirect labels include, by way of example and not limitation, alkaline phosphatase, horseradish peroxidase, lysozyme, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, lactate dehydrogenase and urease. The use of these enzymes in ELISA and EMIT immunoassays is described in detail in Engvall, 1980, Methods in Enzymology, 70:419-439 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,857,453.
- an AK may be labeled with a fluorophore such as fluorescein by incubating the AK with, for example, fluorescein isothiocyanate, using conventional techniques.
- a fluorophore such as fluorescein
- an AK (or a candidate compound produced by recombinant techniques) can be labeled metabolically by culturing cells that express the AK in the presence of culture medium supplemented with a metabolic label, such as, by way of example and not limitation, [ 35 S]-methionine, one or more [ 14 C]-labeled amino acids, one or more [ 15 N]-labeled amino acids and/or [ 3 H]-labeled amino acids (with the tritium substituted at non-labile positions).
- a metabolic label such as, by way of example and not limitation, [ 35 S]-methionine, one or more [ 14 C]-labeled amino acids, one or more [ 15 N]-labeled amino acids and/or [ 3 H]-labeled amino acids (with the tritium substituted at non-labile positions).
- candidate compounds may be screened for the ability to bind an AK using an affinity chromatography technique.
- an AK may be attached to a chromatography resin according to standard techniques to create an AK affinity resin and this AK affinity resin used to identify compounds that bind the resin.
- the candidate compound could be bound to the resin and the resin used to determine whether it binds an AK.
- an active AR02E8 compound of the invention may by attached to the chromatography resin.
- This AR02E8 affinity resin may then be used to bind an AK and the bound complex used to identify compounds that compete for binding the AK with the active AR02E8 compound, typically by washing the resin with a candidate compound and determining whether the candidate compound disrupts the AK-AR02E8 compound complex by assaying for the release of AK from the resin.
- candidate compounds may be screened for the ability to bind an AK on a compound-by-compound basis, it may be more convenient to screen large numbers of candidate compounds simultaneously using one of the many library screening methodologies known in the art.
- One art-known approach uses recombinant bacteriophage to produce large libraries of peptides which can then be screened in a variety of formats for binding to an AK. Using such phage methods, very large libraries of candidate peptides can be constructed (e.g., 10 6 -10 8 peptides) and screened for binding with an AK.
- a second art-known approach uses chemical methods to synthesize libraries of compounds, such as small organic compounds, peptides and/or peptide analogs, attached to beads or wafers that can then be conveniently screened for binding with an AK.
- the libraries may be encoded or non-encoded. Methods of synthesizing such immobilized libraries, as well as methods of screening the libraries are described, for example, in Houghten, 1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5735; Geysen et al., 1986, Molecular Immunology 23:709-715; Geysen et al., 1987, J.
- Non-limiting examples of solid-phase chemical synthesis strategies and conditions useful for synthesizing combinatorial libraries of small organic and other compounds may be found in Bunin, 1998, The Combinatorial Index , Academic Press, London, England (see, e.g., Chapter 1-5) and Hermikens et al., 1996, Tetrahedron 52:4527-4554, as well as the references cited therein, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Another art-known approach utilizes solution-phase chemical synthesis techniques to synthesize libraries of compounds, such as, for example, libraries of small organic compounds, which may then be screened in the assays of the invention.
- Methods for synthesizing and screening such solution-phase libraries are well-known and are described, for example, in Bunin, 1998, The Combinatorial Index , Academic Press, England (see, e.g., Chapter 6); WO 95/02566; U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,736; U.S. Pat. No. 5,766,481; U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,412 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,171, and the references cited therein; the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- binding affinities can be determined using saturation kinetics and Scatchard analysis.
- saturation kinetics the binding assay can be performed with increasing concentrations of the candidate compound, which is typically labeled with, for example, a radiolabel.
- the candidate compounds identified will have a dissociation constant (Kd) for AK on the order of 1 mM, 100 ⁇ M, 10 ⁇ M, 1 ⁇ M, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower.
- the candidate compounds identified will exhibit an IC 50 in a competitive binding assay with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention or another compound that competes for binding an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention on the order of 1 mM, 100 ⁇ M, 10 ⁇ M, 1 ⁇ M, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower.
- the IC 50 represents the concentration of candidate compound that displaces 50% of the bound AR02E8 or other compound. Suitable assays for measuring such IC 50 s are well-known.
- the ability of identified candidate compounds to modulate or regulate IL-4 induced IgE production and/or processes associated therewith can be confirmed in in vitro assays, such as those described herein in connection with the identification of the AR02E8 compounds, for example, as described in the Examples.
- in vitro assays such as those described herein in connection with the identification of the AR02E8 compounds, for example, as described in the Examples.
- Other assays that are well known in the art may be used, for example, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707.
- Knowledge of the interaction surface between a AR02E8 compound of the invention such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS and/or peptide AR02E8VC and an AK, and in particular the AK amino acids involved in binding the AR02E8 compound, can also provide useful information for identifying compounds that bind an AK. Identification and screening of AK binding compounds is further facilitated by determining structural features of an AK-AR02E8 compound complex, e.g., using X-ray crystallography, neutron diffraction, nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometry or any other techniques for structure determination. These techniques provide for the rational design or in silico identification of compounds that bind an AK.
- the crystal structure of human adenosine kinase has been determined to 1.5 A resolution (Mathews, et al. (1998) Biochem. 37:15607)
- Candidate compounds identified using the screening assays of the invention may be agonists or antagonists of the AK.
- the identified compounds may bind to the AK without activating it or may inhibit one or more biological activities of AK (antagonist) or, alternatively, the identified compounds may activate one or more biological activities of the AK (agonists).
- These functional assays also provide an indirect means of assessing whether a candidate compound binds an AK. Observation of agonist or antagonist activity indicates the candidate compound binds the AK.
- the method of the invention may employ functional assays of AK activity to determine whether a candidate compound binds AK.
- Suitable methods for determining the effect of the candidate compound on the activity of AK are well known and include, for example, methods described in Weisner et al. (J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. (1999) 289:1669) and U.S. Pat. No. 5,864,033.
- kits for carrying out the various screening assays and methods of the invention will typically include an AK and a compound that competes for binding with the AK, such as an active AR02E8 compound.
- the AK and/or compound may be labeled or unlabeled.
- the kit may further include additional components useful for carrying out the assays and methods. Non-limiting examples of such additional components include labels, labeling reagents, binding buffers, etc.
- the kit may also include instructions teaching its methods of use.
- the kit comprises and AK and a compound selected from peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS, peptide AR02E8VC, and an analog thereof.
- active compounds can be used in a variety of in vitro, in vivo and ex vivo applications to regulate or modulate processes involved with the production and/or accumulation of IgE.
- the active compounds can be used to modulate, and in particular inhibit, any or all of the following processes in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo: IgE production and/or accumulation; the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to isotype switching and/or production of IgE; IL-4 induced switching of B-cells to produce IgE, IL-4 mediated IgE production; and IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription.
- the active compounds may be used to treat or prevent diseases characterized by, caused by or associated with production and/or accumulation of IgE. Such treatments may be administered to animals in veterinary contexts or to humans.
- Diseases that are characterized by, caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, and that can therefore be treated or prevented with the active compounds include, by way of example and not limitation, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- the active compounds When used to treat or prevent such diseases, the active compounds may be administered singly, as mixtures of one or more active compounds or in mixture or combination with other agents useful for treating such diseases and/or symptoms associated with such diseases.
- the active compounds may also be administered in mixture or in combination with agents useful to treat other disorders or maladies, such as steroids, membrane stabilizers, 5LO inhibitors, leukotriene synthesis and receptor inhibitors, IgE receptor inhibitors, ⁇ -agonists, tryptase inhibitors and antihistamines, to name a few.
- the active compounds may be administered per se or as pharmaceutical compositions.
- compositions comprising the active compounds of the invention may be manufactured by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or lyophilization processes.
- the compositions may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers, diluents, excipients or auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically.
- the actual pharmaceutical composition administered will depend upon the mode of administration. Virtually any mode of administration may be used, including, for example topical, oral, systemic, inhalation, injection, transdermal, etc.
- the active compound may be formulated in the pharmaceutical compositions per se, or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
- pharmaceutically acceptable salt means those salts which retain substantially the biological effectiveness and properties of the active compound and which is not biologically or otherwise undesirable.
- Such salts may be prepared from inorganic and organic acids and bases, as is well-known in the art. Typically, such salts are more soluble in aqueous solutions than the corresponding free acids and bases.
- the active compound(s) may be formulated as solutions, gels, ointments, creams, suspensions, etc. as are well-known in the art.
- Systemic formulations include those designed for administration by injection, e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intrathecal or intraperitoneal injection, as well as those designed for transdermal, transmucosal oral or pulmonary administration.
- Useful injectable preparations include sterile suspensions, solutions or emulsions of the active compound(s) in aqueous or oily vehicles.
- the compositions may also contain formulating agents, such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agent.
- the formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampules or in multidose containers, and may contain added preservatives.
- the injectable formulation may be provided in powder form for reconstitution with a suitable vehicle, including but not limited to sterile pyrogen free water, buffer, dextrose solution, etc., before use.
- a suitable vehicle including but not limited to sterile pyrogen free water, buffer, dextrose solution, etc.
- the active compound(s) may dried by any art-known technique, such as lyophilization, and reconstituted prior to use.
- penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
- penetrants are known in the art.
- the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycolate); or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate).
- binding agents e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
- fillers e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate
- lubricants e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica
- disintegrants e.g., potato star
- Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, elixirs, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
- Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid).
- the preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
- Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
- compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
- the active compound(s) may be formulated as solutions (for retention enemas) suppositories or ointments containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
- the active compound(s) can be conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressurized packs or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
- a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
- a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
- a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas
- the active compound(s) can be formulated as a depot preparation, for administration by implantation; e.g., subcutaneous, intradermal, or intramuscular injection.
- the active ingredient may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (e.g., as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives; e.g., as a sparingly soluble salt.
- transdermal delivery systems manufactured as an adhesive disc or patch which slowly releases the active compound(s) for percutaneous absorption may be used.
- permeation enhancers may be used to facilitate transdermal penetration of the active compound(s).
- Suitable transdermal patches are described in for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,407,713.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,352,456; U.S. Pat. No. 5,332,213; U.S. Pat. No. 5,336,168; U.S. Pat. No. 5,290,561; U.S. Pat. No. 5,254,346; U.S. Pat. No. 5,164,189; U.S. Pat. No. 5,163,899; U.S. Pat. No. 5,088,977; U.S. Pat. No. 5,087,240; U.S. Pat. No. 5,008,110; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,921,475.
- Liposomes and emulsions are well-known examples of delivery vehicles that may be used to deliver active compounds(s).
- Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) may also be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
- DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
- active compound(s) that are peptides composed wholly of genetically-encoded amino acids may be administered utilizing well-known gene therapy techniques.
- a gene encoding the active compound may be introduced either in vivo, ex vivo, or in vitro in a viral vector.
- viral vectors include an attenuated or defective DNA virus, such as but not limited to, herpes simplex virus (HSV), papillomavirus, Epstein Barr virus (EBV), adenovirus, adeno-associated virus (AAV), and the like.
- HSV herpes simplex virus
- EBV Epstein Barr virus
- AAV adeno-associated virus
- Defective viruses which entirely or almost entirely lack viral genes, are preferred.
- Defective virus is not infective after introduction into a cell.
- Use of defective viral vectors allows for administration to cells in a specific, localized area, without concern that the vector can infect other cells.
- lymphocyte B-cells can be specifically targeted.
- particular vectors include, but are not limited to, a defective herpes virus I (HSV1) vector (Kaplitt et al., 1991, Molec. Cell. Neurosci. 2:320-330), an attenuated adenovirus vector, such as the vector described by Stratford-Perricaudet et al., 1992, J. Clin. Invest.
- an appropriate immunosuppressive treatment is employed in conjunction with the viral vector, e.g., adenovirus vector, to avoid immuno-deactivation of the viral vector and transfected cells.
- the viral vector e.g., adenovirus vector
- immunosuppressive cytokines such as interleukin-12 (IL-12), interferon- ⁇ (IFN- ⁇ ), or anti-CD4 antibody
- IL-12 interleukin-12
- IFN- ⁇ interferon- ⁇
- anti-CD4 antibody can be administered to block humoral or cellular immune responses to the viral vectors (see, e.g., Wilson, 1995, Nat. Med. 1(9):887-889).
- a viral vector that is engineered to express a minimal number of antigens.
- the gene can be introduced in a retroviral vector, e.g., as described in Anderson et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,346; Mann et al., 1983, Cell 33:153; Temin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,650,764; Temin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,980,289; Markowitz et al., 1988, J. Virol. 62:1120 (1988); Temin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,124,263; Dougherty et al., WO 95/07358; and Kuo et al., 1993, Blood 82:845.
- Targeted gene delivery is described in WO 95/28494.
- the vector can be introduced by lipofection.
- liposomes for encapsulation and transfection of nucleic acids in vitro.
- Synthetic cationic lipids designed to limit the difficulties and dangers encountered with liposome mediated transfection can be used to prepare liposomes for in vivo transfection of a gene encoding a marker (Felgner et. al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:7413-7417; Mackey et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:8027-8031).
- cationic lipids may promote encapsulation of negatively charged nucleic acids, and also promote fusion with negatively charged cell membranes (Felgner & Ringold, 1989, Science 337:387-388).
- lipofection to introduce exogenous genes into the specific organs in vivo has certain practical advantages.
- Molecular targeting of liposomes to specific cells represents one area of benefit. It is clear that directing transfection to particular cell types would be particularly advantageous in a tissue with cellular heterogeneity, such as pancreas, liver, kidney, and the brain.
- Lipids may be chemically coupled to other molecules for the purpose of targeting (see Mackey et al., 1988, supra).
- Targeted peptides e.g., hormones or neurotransmitters, and proteins such as antibodies, or non-peptide molecules could be coupled to liposomes chemically.
- naked DNA vectors for gene therapy can be introduced into the desired host cells by methods known in the art, e.g., transfection, electroporation, microinjection, transduction, cell fusion, DEAE dextran, calcium phosphate precipitation, use of a gene gun, or use of a DNA vector transporter (see, e.g., Wu et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:963-967; Wu & Wu, 1988, J. Biol. Chem., 263:14621-14624; Canadian Patent Application No. 2,012,311).
- Naked nucleic acids encoding the active compound may also be introduced using the gene-activated matrices described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,427.
- the active compound(s) of the invention, or compositions thereof, will generally be used in an amount effective to treat or prevent the particular disease being treated.
- the compound(s) may be administered therapeutically to achieve therapeutic benefit or prophylactically to achieve prophylactic benefit.
- therapeutic benefit is meant eradication or amelioration of the underlying disorder being treated, e.g., eradication or amelioration of the underlying allergy, atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema or atopic asthma, and/or eradication or amelioration of one or more of the symptoms associated with the underlying disorder such that the patient reports an improvement in feeling or condition, notwithstanding that the patient may still be afflicted with the underlying disorder.
- administering provides therapeutic benefit not only when the underlying allergic response is eradicated or ameliorated, but also when the patient reports a decrease in the severity or duration of the symptoms associated with the allergy following exposure to the allergen.
- Therapeutic benefit also includes halting or slowing the progression of the disease, regardless of whether improvement is realized.
- the active compound may be administered to a patient at risk of developing a disorder characterized by, caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, such as the various disorders previously described. For example, if it is unknown whether a patient is allergic to a particular drug, the active compound may be administered prior to administration of the drug to avoid or ameliorate an allergic response to the drug.
- prophylactic administration may be applied to avoid the onset of symptoms in a patient diagnosed with the underlying disorder.
- an active compound may be administered to an allergy sufferer prior to expected exposure to the allergen.
- Active compounds may also be administered prophylactically to healthy individuals who are repeatedly exposed to agents known to induce an IgE-related malady to prevent the onset of the disorder.
- an active compound may be administered to a healthy individual who is repeatedly exposed to an allergen known to induce allergies, such as latex allergy, in an effort to prevent the individual from developing an allergy.
- the amount of active compound(s) administered will depend upon a variety of factors, including, for example, the particular indication being treated, the mode of administration, whether the desired benefit is prophylactic or therapeutic, the severity of the indication being treated and the age and weight of the patient, the bioavailability of the particular active compound, etc. Determination of an effective dosage is well within the capabilities of those skilled in the art.
- Initial dosages may be estimated initially from in vitro assays.
- an initial dosage for use in animals may be formulated to achieve a circulating blood or serum concentration of active compound that inhibits about 25% or more of IL-4 induced IgE production, or a process associated therewith, such as germline ⁇ transcription, as measured in an in vitro assay.
- an initial dosage for use in animals may be formulated to achieve a circulating blood or serum concentration of active compound that is equal to or greater than the IC 50 as measured in an AK competitive binding assay with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- Initial dosages can also be estimated from in vivo data, such as animal models.
- Animals models useful for testing the efficacy of compounds to treat or prevent diseases characterized by, caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation are well-known in the art. Suitable animal models of hypersensitivity or allergic reactions are described in Foster, 1995, Allergy 50(21Suppl):6-9, discussion 34-38 and Tumas et al., 2001, J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 107(6):1025-1033. Suitable animal models of allergic rhinitis are described in Szelenyi et al., 2000, Arzneiffenforschung 50(11):1037-42; Kawaguchi et al., 1994, Clin. Exp.
- Suitable animal models of atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and atopic asthma are described in Chan et al., 2001, J. Invest. Dermatol. 117(4):977-983 and Suto et al., 1999, Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 120(Suppl 1):70-75. Ordinarily skilled artisans can routinely adapt such information to determine dosages suitable for human administration.
- Dosage amounts will typically be in the range of from about 1 mg/kg/day to about 100 mg/kg/day, 200 mg/kg/day, 300 mg/kg/day, 400 mg/kg/day or 500 mg/kg/day, but may be higher or lower, depending upon, among other factors, the activity of the active compound, its bioavailability, the mode of administration and various factors discussed above. Dosage amount and interval may be adjusted individually to provide plasma levels of the active compound(s) which are sufficient to maintain therapeutic or prophylactic effect. In cases of local administration or selective uptake, such as local topical administration, the effective local concentration of active compound(s) may not be related to plasma concentration. Skilled artisans will be able to optimize effective local dosages without undue experimentation.
- the compound(s) may be administered once per day, a few or several times per day, or even multiple times per day, depending upon, among other things, the indication being treated and the judgement of the prescribing physician.
- the active compound(s) will provide therapeutic or prophylactic benefit without causing substantial toxicity.
- Toxicity of the active compound(s) may be determined using standard pharmaceutical procedures.
- the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic (or prophylactic) effect is the therapeutic index.
- Active compound(s) that exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred.
- Peptide AR02E8wt was identified by screening a retroviral library of random peptide 20-mers for the ability to inhibit IL-4 induced germline ⁇ transcription using the HBEGF2a/diphtheria dual reporter phenotypic screening system described in WO 01/31232.
- A5T4 reporter cells (described in more detail below) were infected with an infectious retroviral library of random peptide 20-mers (prepared as described in WO 97/27213; see also WO 01/34806 at page 39, line 36 through page 40, line 19).
- the retroviral vector used includes a gene encoding blue fluorescent protein (BFP) fused upstream of the region encoding the random peptide via a linker region encoding an ⁇ -helical peptide linker (expression fusion product is referred to as “BFP-peptide”).
- BFP-peptide expression fusion product is referred to as “BFP-peptide”.
- Expression of the BFP-peptide product is controlled by a promoter sensitive to the tetracycline-regulated transactivator such that expression of the BFP-peptide is regulated by tetracycline (Tet) or doxycycline (Dox).
- Tet tetracycline
- Dox doxycycline
- the BFP reporter gene provides a rapid phenotypic assay to determine whether cells were infected: infected cells express BFP-peptide and fluoresce blue (phenotype BFP + ), uninfected cells do not express BFP-peptide, and do not fluoresce blue (phenotype BFP ⁇ ).
- the region of the vector encoding the random peptide was of the sequence (NNK) 20 , where each N independently represents A, T, C or G and K represents T or G.
- the library was also biased to account for degeneracy in the genetic code.
- the A5T4 reporter cell line was engineered from BJAB B-cells (Menezes et al., 1975, Biomedicine 22:276-284; Source: Yoshinobu Matsuo, PhD., Fujisaki Cell Center, Hayashibara Biochemical Labs, Inc., 675-1 Fujisaki, Okayama 702-8006, Japan) and includes a reporter gene encoding the HBEGF2a/GFP dual function reporter positioned downstream of an engineered 600 base pair IL-4 responsive fragment of an ⁇ promoter ( FIG. 1 ; see also WO 99/58663) such that ultimate expression of the dual function reporter is driven by the ⁇ promoter.
- the dual function reporter When expressed, the dual function reporter cleaves into two pieces, a heparin-binding epidermal growth factor-like growth factor (HBEGF) and a green fluorescent protein (GFP), via the self-cleaving 2a sequence (Donnelly et al., 2001, J. Gen. Viol. 82:1027-1041; Donnelly et al., 1997, J. Gen. Virol. 78:13-21; Mattion et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70:8124; Ryan et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13:928-33 Ryan et al., 1991, J. Gen. Virol. 72:2727; Hellen et al., 1989, Biochem.
- HEGF heparin-binding epidermal growth factor-like growth factor
- GFP green fluorescent protein
- HBEGF diphtheria toxin
- Stimulated BFP + cells expressing an inhibitory peptide do not fluoresce green and are not DT sensitive.
- the toxin-conditional selection and Tet or Dox-controlled peptide expression features of the A5T4 screening line are illustrated in FIGS. 2A & 2B , respectively.
- the library was enriched for cells expressing peptides that inhibit IL-4 induced transcription as generally outlined in the top half of FIG. 3 and sorted by FACS into single cell clones. The clones were then screened as generally illustrated in the lower half of FIG. 3 . Briefly, for screening, each clone was divided into two populations and one population was treated with Dox (10 ng/ml). After 5 days, both populations were stimulated with IL-4 (final conc. 60 U/mL; PeptroTech, Inc.) and, after 3 more days, both populations were analyzed by FACS to measure BFP and GFP fluorescence.
- FACS data were converted to a “reporter ratio”, which is defined for this purpose as the ratio of the geometric mean of GFP fluorescence of the +IL-4/+Dox to the +IL-4/ ⁇ Dox populations.
- Reporter ratio is defined for this purpose as the ratio of the geometric mean of GFP fluorescence of the +IL-4/+Dox to the +IL-4/ ⁇ Dox populations.
- Cells expressing a peptide that inhibits germline ⁇ transcription have a reporter ratio of >1.1.
- a reporter ratio of >1.2 is indicative of strong inhibition.
- sequences of peptides expressed by positive clones were obtained by RT-PCR amplification of the integrated peptide-expressing sequences.
- reporter ratios of >1.1 were obtained by RT-PCR amplification of the integrated peptide-expressing sequences.
- 218 positive clones were identified, 199 of which were unique.
- 155 total clones with a reporter ratio of >1.19 were identified, 136 of which were unique.
- Clone AR02E8, which encodes peptide AR02E8wt was amongst the positive clones identified (clone AR02E8 had a reporter ratio of 1.77.
- peptide AR02E8wt was confirmed in na ⁇ ve cells. Briefly, Phoenix cells were transfected with a retroviral vector encoding a BFP-AR02E8wt peptide fusion as described in WO 99/58663 and WO 97/27213. Na ⁇ ve A5T4 cells were infected with the resultant virions and grown for 3 days. The infected cells were stimulated with IL-4 (60 U/mL) and, after 3 days, the cells were assessed by FACS for BFP and GFP. The FACS data are presented in FIG. 4 . As illustrated in FIG.
- BFP + infected cells that express the BFP-peptide fusion
- BFP ⁇ uninfected cells that do not
- the BFP fluorescence data corresponding to the BFP + and BFP ⁇ populations are provided in Panel A.
- the GFP fluorescence data corresponding to the BFP + and BFP ⁇ populations are presented in Panel B.
- the reporter ratio for this purpose is determined as the geometric mean of the GFP fluorescence of the BFP ⁇ population divided by the geometric mean of the GFP fluorescence of the BFP + population.
- the reporter ratio for the AR02E8 in this re-infection assay was 2.93.
- A5T4 cells were infected with retrovirus capable of expressing peptide AR02E8wt (prepared as described above). The cells were sorted for BFP + to select for infected cells. Infected cells were divided into two populations. One population was exposed to Dox (10 ng/ml). Both populations were stimulated with IL-4 (60 U/ml).
- the primers and probe which are specific for the transcription product driven by the A5T4 endogenous ⁇ promoter, were as follows (the probe was labeled at the 5′-end with Fam and at the 3′-end with Tamra): ⁇ forward primer: ATCCACAGGCACCAAATGGA (SEQ ID NO:5) ⁇ reverse primer: GGAAGACGGATGGGCTCTG (SEQ ID NO:6) ⁇ probe: ACCCGGCGCTTCAGCCTCCA (SEQ ID NO:7)
- Peptide AR02E8wt is Selective for the Germline ⁇ Promoter
- peptide AR02E8wt was tested for inhibition of germline ⁇ transcription.
- the assay was similar to that described in the immediately preceding section, except that ST486 cells (ATCC # CRL-1647) engineered to express the tetracycline-regulated transactivator were infected and the infected cells were stimulated with TGF- ⁇ (40 ng/ml; Peprotech).
- the primers and probe which are specific for the transcription product driven by the ST486 endogenous ⁇ promoter, were as follows (the probe was labeled at the 5′-end with Fam and at the 3′-end with Tamra): ⁇ forward primer: CAGCACTGCGGGCCC (SEQ ID NO:8) ⁇ reverse primer: TCAGCGGGAAGACCTTGG (SEQ ID NO:9) ⁇ probe: CCAGCAGCCTGACCAGCATCCC (SEQ ID NO:10)
- Heparin (Sigma H3393, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Histopaque 1077 tubes (Sigma A0561, St. Louis, Mo.)
- IMDM Iscove's Modified Dulbeccos Medium
- BSA Bovine Serum Albumin
- FCS Fetal Bovine Serum
- HI-FCS Fetal Bovine Serum
- Bovine Insulin (Sigma I1882, St. Louis, Mo.)
- L-Gln 200 mM L-Glutamine (“L-Gln”; Sigma G7513, St. Louis, Mo.) (stored as 5 ml aliquots at ⁇ 20° C.)
- Pen/Strep 10% solution (Sigma P0781, St. Louis, Mo.) (stored as 5 ml aliquots at ⁇ 20° C.)
- Recombinant Human IL-4 (R&D Systems 204-1L, Minneapolis, Minn.) (stored as a stock solution of 100,000 U/ml in culture medium at ⁇ 20° C.)
- Culture Medium supplement 500 ml IMDM with 0.5% BSA (2.5 g), 10% HI-FCS (50 ml), 25 mg human transferrin, 2.5 mg bovine insulin, 2 mM L-Gln (5 ml) and 1% pen/strep (5 mL). Filter sterilize before use.
- Lymphocytes are isolated from the blood according to the protocol below:
- the assay is carried out as follows:
- each compound stock solution 1:20 with culture medium to yield a 500 ⁇ M solution in 5% DMSO.
- Murine anti human IgE (GEI clone) (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.)
- PBS Phosphate buffered saline
- BSA Bovine serum albumin
- TWEEN 20 Polyethylenesorbitan monolaurate
- OPD tablets (DAKO Corp., Carpenteria, Calif.)
- Streptavidin biotinylated horseradish peroxidase complex (“Streptavidin HRP”; Amersham, Piscataway, N.J.)
- Biotinylated anti human IgE (Vector Laboratories, Inc., Burlingame, Calif.)
- Buffer A 0.1 M NaHCO 3 , pH 9.6
- Buffer B 0.1% TWEEN 20 in PBS
- Buffer C 1% BSA in Buffer B
- the assay which measures the amount of IgE synthesized by the various controls and samples prepared above, is carried out as described in the following protocol:
- binding partners for peptide AR02E8wt were identified in a ⁇ -galactosidase yeast two-hybrid (YTH) assay using peptide AR02E8wt as bait and a cDNA library constructed from the A5T4 reporter cell line as prey. Binding was assessed by ⁇ -galactosidase quantification using BetaFluor (Novagen) as a substrate. A negative interaction control (no cDNA fused downstream of the GAL4 activation domain sequence) was also run. A general outline of the YTH assay is illustrated in FIG. 5A .
- YTH assay Potential targets identified in the YTH assay were reconfirmed as generally outlined in FIG. 6 .
- the cDNA clones identified as hits in the YTH assay were purified and rescreened for interaction with the AR02E8wt peptide in a YTH assay.
- the hit clones were also screened in a control assay for interaction with the BFP using a vector (pGBKT7) that contained only the BFP and not the AR02E8 peptide. At this stage, 27 putative target clones remained.
- a mutant that exhibits an increase in function (as compared to the wild-type peptide) in the functional assay will exhibit an increase in interaction (as compared to the wild-type peptide) in a YTH assay with the target polypeptide of the wild-type peptide.
- the target polypeptide will yield an interaction profile that corresponds closely to the functional profile when compared visually or by other means.
- a collection of AR02E8 mutants was generated by replacing single or double amino acid residues in the sequence of AR02E8wt with a different amino acid, typically an alanine or glycine, as described in copending application Ser. No. 10/095,659, entitled Methods of Identifying Protein Targets, filed Mar. 8, 2002 attorney docket RIGL-003/00US.
- the functional profiles for the mutants derived from AR02E8wt was obtained by constructing and screening for activity in the A5T4 reporter cell line in the manner described above. The activity of each mutant at the germline promoter is reflected in the reporter ratio as described above. The reporter ratios were the functional values that were used to develop the functional profiles.
- TABLE 2 depicts the amino acid sequences (the dual alanine/glycine mutations are underlined) of the mutants tested and the measured reporter ratios when screening in the A5T4 reporter line.
- Re- Peptide porter Name Peptide Sequence Ratio SEQ ID NO AR02E8wt DTMQVQCGVCRSGYVVAFWDVGP 2.93 (SEQ ID NO: 1) AR02E8VC DTMQVQCG AG RSGYVVAFWDVGP 1.13 (SEQ ID NO: 2) AR02E8RS DTMQVQCGVC AG GYVVAFWDVGP 1.46 (SEQ ID NO: 3) AR02E8YV DTMQVQCGVCRSG AG VAFWDVGP 1.07 (SEQ ID NO: 4)
- the interaction of AR02E8wt peptide and its mutants with the clones identified as potential targets for the peptide AR02E8wt was then quantified in a ⁇ -galactosidase YTH assay.
- the YTH assay was performed in the manner described above. A general outline of this YTH assay is illustrated in FIG. 5B .
- an interaction profile was developed by comparing the ⁇ -galactosidase activity of each mutant to that of the wild type peptide as described above.
- each mutant was categorized into one of four functional categories: (1) reduction of function (ROF); (2) loss of function (LOF); (3) increase of function (IOF) or (4) functionally neutral (N) as compared to the activity of the wild type peptide, here AR02E8wt.
- ROF reduction of function
- LEF loss of function
- IPF increase of function
- N functionally neutral
- cells expressing a peptide that inhibits germline ⁇ transcription have reporter ratios of ⁇ 1.1.
- Cells expressing a loss of function (LOF) mutant have a reporter ratio of ⁇ 1.11.
- An increase of function mutant shows a>50% increase in reporter ratio and a reduction of function (ROF) of mutant shows a>50% decrease in reporter ratio.
- Functionally neutral mutants have reporter ratios that fall within ⁇ 50% of that of the AR02E8wt peptide. The % increase or decrease in reporter ratio is calculated after subtracting 1.0 from the individual ratios. Using these criteria, peptide AR02E8VC (SEQ ID NO:2) and peptide ARO2E8RS (SEQ ID NO:3) were designated as ROF mutants, and peptide AR02E8YV (SEQ ID NO:4) was designated as a LOF mutant. No IOF mutant were found for the AR02E8 clone.
- the interaction of these IOF, ROF and LOF mutants with different polypeptides encoded by the putative target clones were quantified using the YTH assay described above. Based on the YTH assay, for each putative target, the mutants were categorized into the following four interaction categories: (1) reduction of interaction (ROI); (2) loss of interaction (LOI); (3) increase of interaction (IOI); and (4) interactionally neutral (N), by assessing the binding affinity ratio of the mutant peptide and the wild type peptide ( ⁇ -gal activity of mutant/wild type) to the putative target. The selection criteria for categorizing the interactions is shown on FIG. 8 .
- FIG. 9 graphic profile representations for each potential target polypeptide were obtained using a weighted categorization process as depicted in FIG. 9 .
- the functional profile reporter ratios of AR02E8wt and its three mutants
- the interaction profile ⁇ -galactosidase signal from the YTH assay for AR02E8wt and its three mutants
- the X-axis is further categorized into L (loss of function), R (reduction of function), N (functionally neutral), and I (increase of function) based on the reporter ratios, as described above.
- the Y-axis is further categorized based on the criteria in FIG. 8 .
- profiles that correspond closely have interaction values (in this case, ⁇ -galactosidase signal) and functional values (in this case, reporter ratios) that fall along a line with a positive slope.
- the mutants fall within the same category type using both the reporter ratio and the ⁇ -galactosidase signal, i.e., a mutant categorized as a L based on the reporter ratio is also categorized as a L based on the ⁇ -galactosidase signal.
- the interaction and functional profiles for 4.2AR02E8 clone NS 358 (4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_U — 358) fall along a line with a positive slope.
- Each of the three mutants also fall within the same respective categories based on both reporter ratio and ⁇ -galactosidase signal.
- the profiles for the other putative target clones selected in the initial YTH screen do not satisfy these criteria.
- polypeptide encoded by 4.2AR02E8 clone NS 358 was identified as a target for peptide AR02E8wt.
- the clone was sequenced and a sequence comparison (using a Blast search with default parameters) with sequences in the NCBI (GenBank) nucleic acid sequence database was carried out. From this sequence comparison, clone 4.2AR02E8 clone NS 358 was determined to be human adenosine kinase, NCBI accession # NM — 001123 (short isoform), NM — 006721 (long isoform); protein accession # NP — 001114 and NP — 006712.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
- Saccharide Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
The present provides compounds capable of modulating IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production, as well as IL-4 induced processes associated therewith, methods and kits for identifying such compounds that utilize an adenosine kinase as a surrogate analyte and methods of using the compounds in a variety of in vitro, in vitro and ex vivo contexts.
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/197,381, filed Jul. 16, 2002, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The present invention relates to compounds that modulate processes associated with isotype switching of B cells and IgE production, methods and kits for identifying such compounds and methods of using such compounds in a variety of contexts, such as for the treatment or prevention of diseases associated with or characterized by production and/or accumulation of IgE, including anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, and IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- The immune system protects the body against invasion by foreign environmental agents such as microorganisms or their products, foods, chemicals, drugs, molds, pollen, animal hair or dander, etc. The ability of the immune system to protect the body against such foreign invaders may be innate or acquired.
- The acquired immune response, which stems from exposure to the foreign invader, is extremely complex and involves numerous types of cells that interact with one another in myriad ways to express the full range of immune response. Two of these cell types come from a common lymphoid precursor cell but differentiate along different developmental lines. One line matures in the thymus (T-cells); the other line matures in the bone marrow (B-cells). Although T- and B-cells differ in many functional respects, they share one of the important properties of the immune response: they both exhibit specificity towards a foreign invader (antigen). Thus, the major recognition and reaction functions of the immune response are contained within the lymph cells.
- A third cell type that participates in the acquired immune response is the class of cells referred to as antigen-presenting cells (APC). Unlike the T- and B-cells, the APC do not have antigen-specificity. However, they play an important role in processing and presenting the antigen to the T-cells.
- While the T- and B-cells are both involved in acquired immunity, they have different functions. Both T- and B-cells have antigen-specific receptors on their surfaces that, when bound by the antigen, activate the cells to release various products. In the case of B-cells, the surface receptors are immunoglobulins and the products released by the activated B-cells are immunoglobulins that have the same specificity for the antigen as the surface receptor immunoglobulins. In the case of activated T-cells, the products released are not the same as their surface receptor immunoglobulins, but are instead other molecules, called cytokines, that affect other cells and participate in the elimination of the antigen. One such cytokine, released by a class of T-cells called helper T-cells, is interleukin-4 (IL-4).
- The immunoglobulins produced and released by B-cells must bind to a vast array of foreign invaders (antigens). All immunoglobulins share certain common structural features that enable them to: (1) recognize and bind specifically to a unique structural feature on an antigen (termed an epitope); and (2) perform a common biological function after binding the antigen. Basically, each immunoglobulin consists of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains. The H chains are linked together via disulfide bridges. The portion of the immunoglobulin that binds the antigen includes the amino-terminal regions of both L and H chains. There are five major classes of H chains, termed α, δ,ε, γ and μ, providing five different isotypes of immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG and IgM. Although all five classes of immunoglobulins may possess precisely the same specificity for an antigen, they all have different biological functions.
- While the immune system provides tremendous benefits in protecting the body against foreign invaders, particularly those that cause infectious diseases, its effects are sometimes damaging. For example, in the process of eliminating an invading foreign substance some tissue damage may occur, typically as a result of the accumulation of immunoglobulins with non-specific effects. Such damage is generally temporary, ceasing once the foreign invader has been eliminated. However, there are instances, such as in the case of hypersensitivity or allergic reactions, where the immune response directed against even innocuous agents such as inhaled pollen, inhaled mold spores, insect bite products, medications and even foods, is so powerful that it results in severe pathological consequences or symptoms.
- Such hypersensitivity or allergic reactions are divided into four classes, designated types I-IV. The symptoms of the type I allergic reactions, called anaphylactic reactions or anaphylaxis, include the common symptoms associated with mild allergies, such as runny nose, watery eyes, etc., as well as the more dangerous, and often fatal, symptoms of difficulty in breathing (asthma), asphyxiation (typically due to constriction of smooth muscle around the bronchi in the lungs) and a sharp drop in blood pressure. Also included within the class of type I allergic reactions are atopic reactions, including atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and atopic asthma.
- Even when not lethal, such anaphylactic allergic reactions produce symptoms that interfere with the enjoyment of normal life. One need only witness the inability of an allergy sufferer to mow the lawn or hike through the woods to understand the disruptive force even mild allergies have on everyday life. Thus, while the immune system is quite beneficial, it would be desirable to be able to interrupt its response to invading foreign agents that pose no risk or threat to the body.
- IgE immunoglobulins are crucial immune mediators of such anaphylactic hypersensitivity and allergic reactions, and have been shown to be responsible for the induction and maintenance of anaphylactic allergic symptoms. For example, anti-IgE antibodies have been shown to interfere with IgE function and alleviate allergic symptoms (Jardieu, 1995, Curr. Op. Immunol. 7:779-782; Shields et al., 1995, Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 107:308-312). Thus, release and/or accumulation of IgE immunoglobulins are believed to play a crucial role in the anaphylactic allergic response to innocuous foreign invaders. Other diseases associated with or mediated by IgE production and/or accumulation include, but are not limited to, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies and B-cell lymphoma.
- Although IgEs are produced and released by B-cells, the cells must be activated to do so (B-cells initially produce only IgD and IgM). The isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE is a complex process that involves the replacement of certain immunoglobulin constant (C) regions with other C regions that have biologically distinct effector functions, without altering the specificity of the immunoglobulin. For IgE switching, a deletional rearrangement of the IgH chain gene locus occurs, which results in the joining of the switch region of the μ gene, Sμ, with the corresponding region of the ε gene, Sε.
- This IgE switching is induced in part by IL-4 (or IL-13) produced by T-cells. The IL-4 induction initiates transcription through the Sε region, resulting in the synthesis of germline (or “sterile”) ε transcripts (that is, transcripts of the unrearranged Cε H genes) that lead to the production of IgE instead of IgM.
- IL-4 induced germline ε transcription and consequent synthesis of IgE is inhibited by interferon gamma (IFN-γ), interferon alpha (IFN-α) and tumor growth factor beta (TGF-β). In addition to the IL-4 signal, a second signal, also normally delivered by T-cells, is required for switch recombination leading to the production of IgE. This second T-cell signal may be replaced by monoclonal antibodies to CD40, infection by Epstein-Barr virus or hydrocortisone.
- Generally, traditional treatments for diseases mediated by IgE production and/or accumulation regulate the immune system following synthesis of IgE. For example, traditional therapies for the treatment of allergies include anti-histamines designed to modulate the IgE-mediated response resulting in mast cell degranulation. Drugs are also known that generally downregulate IgE production or that inhibit switching of, but not induction of, germline ε transcription (see, e.g., Loh et al., 1996, J. Allerg. Clin. Immunol. 97(5):1141).
- Although these treatments are often effective, treatments that act to reduce or eliminate IgE production altogether would be desirable. By reducing or eliminating IgE production, the hypersensitivity or allergic response may be reduced or eliminated altogether. Accordingly, the availability of compounds that are upstream modulators of IgE production, such as compounds capable of modulating, and in particular inhibiting, IL-4 receptor-mediated germline ε transcription, would be highly desirable.
- The ability to screen for compounds capable of modulating IgE production, and in particular compounds that modulate IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ε transcription typically involves screening candidate compounds in complex cell-based functional assays, such as the functional assays described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707. These assays typically involve contacting a cell comprising a reporter gene operably linked to a promoter responsive to or inducible by IL-4 with a candidate compound of interest in the presence of IL-4 and assessing the amount of reporter gene product produced. The reporter gene is typically a gene that encodes a protein that produces an observable signal, such as a fluorescent protein. The IL-4 inducible promoter may be a germline ε promoter. Compounds that antagonize (inhibit) IL-4 induced transcription will yield reduced amounts of reporter gene product as compared to control cells contacted with IL-4 alone. Compounds that agonize IL-4 induced transcription will yield increased amounts of reporter gene product as compared to control cells contacted with IL-4 alone. Particularly useful functional assays for screening compounds for the ability to modulate IL-4 inducible germline ε transcription are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707, WO 99/58663 and WO 01/34806.
- Although such functional screening assays are quite powerful and effective, simpler assays that could be performed in cell-free systems and/or that do not require a functional component, such as simple binding assays with isolated proteins known to be involved in the IL-4 signaling cascade responsible for the production of germline transcripts, and hence the production of IgE, would be beneficial.
- These and other objects are furnished by the present invention, which in one aspect provides compounds, referred to herein as AR02E8 compounds, which are capable of modulating, and in particular inhibiting, the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade involved in B-cell isotype switching to, and consequent production of, IgE. The AR02E8 compounds of the invention are generally 8 to 30 amino acid residue peptides or peptide analogs, or pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, characterized by structural formula (I):
Z1˜X1˜X2˜X3˜X4˜X5˜X6˜X7˜X8˜X9˜X10˜X11˜X12˜X13˜X14˜ X15˜X16˜X17˜X18˜X19˜X20˜X21˜X22˜X23˜Z2 - wherein:
-
- X1 is an acidic residue;
- X2 is a hydroxyl-containing residue;
- X3 is a non-polar residue;
- X4 is a polar residue;
- X5 is an aliphatic residue;
- X6 is a polar residue;
- X7 is a cysteine-like residue;
- X8 is an aliphatic residue;
- X9 is an aliphatic residue;
- X10 is cysteine-like residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X11 is a basic residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X12 is a hydroxyl-containing residue, a small polar residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X13 is an aliphatic residue;
- X14 is an aromatic residue;
- X15 is an aliphatic residue;
- X16 is an aliphatic residue;
- X17 is an aliphatic residue;
- X18 is an aromatic residue;
- X19 is an aromatic residue;
- X20 is an acidic residue;
- X21 is an aliphatic residue;
- X22 is an aliphatic residue;
- X23 is a conformationally constrained residue;
- Z1 is RRN—, RC(O)NR—, RS(O)2NR— or an amino-terminal blocking group;
- Z2 is —C(O)OR, —C(O)O—, —C(O)NRR or a carboxyl-terminal blocking group;
- each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl and substituted heteroarylalkyl;
- each “˜” independently represents an amide, a substituted amide or an isostere of an amide;
- each “−” represents a bond, or a 1 to 10 residue peptide or peptide analog; and wherein one or more of X1, X2, X22, or X23 may be absent.
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention preferably have between 10 and 25 residues; more preferably, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention have between 12 and 23 residues. In particular, the more preferred embodiments have 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 residues. Particular AR02E8 compounds of the invention include:
- peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC, and peptide AR02E8RS.
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ε transcription in cellular assays. As a consequence of this activity, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention can be used to modulate the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade involved in isotype switching to, and consequent production of, IgE. In a specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds may be used to inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced IgE production as a therapeutic approach towards the treatment or prevention of diseases associated with, characterized by or caused by IgE production and/or accumulation, such as anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma. The AR02E8 compound of the invention can also be used in assays to identify other compounds capable of effecting the above activities, as will be described in more detail, below.
- In addition to their ability to inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) inducible germline ε transcription, and hence IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production, the AR02E8 compound of the invention also bind adenosine kinases (AKs). In particular, three AR02E8 compounds of the invention, peptide AR02E8wt (DTMQVQCGVCRSGYVVAFWDVGP; SEQ ID NO:1), peptide AR02E8VC (DTMQVQCGAGRSGYVVAFWDVGP; SEQ ID NO:2) and peptide AR02E8RS (DTMQVQCGVCAGGYVVAFWDVGP; SEQ ID NO:3), were found to bind human AK (hAK) in a yeast two hybrid interaction assay. Quite significantly, the ability of these AR02E8 compounds to bind the hAK in this assay correlates with their observed ability to inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ε transcription. These observations provide the first evidence directly linking AK to the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade responsible for isotype switching to, and consequent production of, IgE, and in particular as being an effector of germline ε transcription. Hence, these observations provide the first evidence directly linking AK to the upstream regulation of isotype switching and/or IgE production.
- This significant discovery enables the ability to use an AK as a “surrogate” analyte in screening assays to identify compounds that modulate or regulate the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to the production of IgE. Since induction of the ε promoter in response to IL-4 (or IL-13) is the first recognizable step necessary for isotype switching and consequent production of IgE, inhibition of IL-4 (or IL-13) induced transcription of the ε promoter should prevent B-cells from switching to and/or producing IgE. This significant discovery therefore permits the ability to use an AK as a surrogate analyte in simple binding assays to identify compounds having a variety of in vitro, in vivo and ex vivo therapeutic uses.
- Accordingly, in another aspect, the invention provides methods of identifying compounds that modulate, and in particular inhibit, the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to the production of IgE. The methods generally comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, wherein the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being a modulator of the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to the production of IgE. In one embodiment of the method, it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding to the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS. In a specific embodiment of the method, compounds that inhibit IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ε transcription are identified. In a further embodiment, the methods comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest is an AK antagonist. The determination of the candidate compound as an AK antagonist can be made in addition to, or as an alternative to, determination of the ability of the candidate compound of interest to bind to an AR02E8 compound.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of identifying compounds that inhibit isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE and/or IgE production. The methods generally comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, wherein the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being an inhibitor of isotype switching and/or IgE production. In one embodiment of the method, it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding to the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS. In a specific embodiment of the method, compounds that inhibit IgE production are identified. In another specific embodiment, compounds that inhibit IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production are identified. In still another specific embodiment, compounds that inhibit AK-mediated IgE production are identified.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides methods of identifying compounds that modulate, and in particular inhibit or downregulate, processes mediated by or associated with IL-4 receptor-mediated B-cell isotype switching and/or IgE production and/or accumulation. Such processes include, but are not limited to, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma. The methods generally involve determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, where the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being a modulator of a process mediated by or associated with IL-4 receptor-mediated isotype switching and/or IgE production and/or accumulation. In one embodiment of the method, it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of identifying compounds useful for treating disorders associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation. The methods generally comprise determining whether a candidate compound of interest binds an AK, wherein the ability to bind the AK identifies the compound as being useful for treating disorders associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation. In one embodiment of the method, it is determined whether the candidate compound competes for binding the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS. Diseases associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation for which therapeutic compounds may be identified according to the methods include, but are not limited to, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- In another aspect, the invention provides compounds identified by the various screening methods of the invention.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions. The compositions generally comprise a AR02E8 compound of the invention, a compound that competes for binding an AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention or a compound identified by the screening methods of the invention and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of modulating, and in particular inhibiting or downregulating, the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade involved in B-cell isotype switching to produce, and/or consequent production of, IgE, or processes involved in this signal transduction cascade, such as IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ε transcription. The method generally involves administering to a cell a compound that binds an AK in an amount effective to modulate this IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade. In one embodiment of the method, the compound inhibits IL-4 (or IL-13) induced germline ε transcription. In another specific embodiment, the compound inhibits AK-mediated germline ε transcription. The method may be practiced in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo. In one embodiment, the cell is administered a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS, or a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of modulating, and in particular inhibiting or downregulating, isotype switching to IgE and/or IgE production. The method generally involves administering to a cell an amount of a compound that binds an AK effective to modulate isotype switching to IgE and/or IgE production. The method may be practiced in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo. In one embodiment, the cell is administered a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS, or a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides methods of treating or preventing diseases associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation. The method generally comprises administering to an animal suffering from such a disease an amount of a compound that binds an AK effective to treat or prevent the disease and/or one or more of its symptoms. In one embodiment, the compound administered is a AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS. In another embodiment, the compound administered is a compound that competes for binding to an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention. Diseases associated with, or mediated or caused by, IgE production and/or accumulation that may be treated or prevented according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions (including food and drug allergies) and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma. The method may be practiced therapeutically to treat the disease once the onset of the disease and/or its associated symptoms have already occurred, or prophylactically to prevent the onset of the disease and/or its associated symptoms. The methods may be practiced in veterinary contexts or in the treatment of humans.
- In a final aspect, the invention provides kits for carrying out the various methods of the invention. In one embodiment, the kit comprises an AK and a AR02E8 compound of the invention or a compound that competes for binding the AK with a AR02E8 compound of the invention. The kit may further include additional components for carrying out the methods of the invention, such as, by way of example and not limitation, buffers, labels and/or labeling reagents and/or instructions teaching methods of using the kits.
-
FIG. 1 illustrates the nucleotide sequence of a 603 bp fragment of the human germline ε promoter (SEQ ID NO:11); -
FIG. 2A provides a cartoon illustrating the diphtheria toxin (DT) selection of reporter cell line A5T4; -
FIG. 2B provides a cartoon illustrating the tetracycline/doxycycline controlled peptide expression system of reporter cell line A5T4; -
FIG. 3 provides a cartoon illustrating the enrichment and screening procedure used to identify certain AR02E8 compounds of the invention; -
FIG. 4 provides DNA transfer data for peptide AR02E8wt; -
FIG. 5A provides a cartoon outlining a yeast two hybrid (YTH) screening assay used to identify potential binding partners or targets for peptide AR02E8wt; -
FIG. 5B provides a cartoon illustrating a yeast two hybrid (YTH) assay used to identify hAK as a binding partner or target for peptide AR02E8wt; -
FIG. 6 provides a cartoon summarizing strategies for reconfirming potential targets identified in the YTH assay depicted inFIG. 5A ; -
FIG. 7 provides interaction graphic profiles for peptide AR02E8wt and mutants derived therefrom; -
FIG. 8 provides selection criteria for the interaction profiling method used to confirm hAK as a binding partner for peptide AR02E8wt; -
FIG. 9 provides weighted graphic interaction/functional profiles for peptide AR02E8wt and mutants derived therefrom. -
FIG. 10 illustrates the amino acid sequences for human adenosine kinase, isoform a (SEQ ID NO: 12) and isoform b (SEQ ID NO:13). - Abbreviations
- The abbreviations used for the genetically encoded amino acids are conventional and are as follows:
Amino Acid Three-Letter Abbreviation One-Letter Abbreviation Alanine Ala A Arginine Arg R Asparagine Asn N Aspartate Asp D Cysteine Cys C Glutamate Glu E Glutamine Gln Q Glycine Gly G Histidine His H Isoleucine Ile I Leucine Leu L Lysine Lys K Methionine Met M Phenylalanine Phe F Proline Pro P Serine Ser S Threonine Thr T Tryptophan Trp W Tyrosine Tyr Y Valine Val V - When the three-letter abbreviations are used, unless specifically preceded by an “L” or a “D,” the amino acid may be in either the L- or D-configuration about α-carbon (Cα). For example, whereas “Ala” designates alanine without specifying the configuration about the α-carbon, “D-Ala” and “L-Ala” designate D-alanine and L-alanine, respectively. When the one-letter abbreviations are used, upper case letters designate amino acids in the L-configuration about the α-carbon and lower case letters designate amino acids in the D-configuration about the α-carbon. For example, “A” designates L-alanine and “a” designates D-alanine. When polypeptide sequences are presented as a string of one-letter or three-letter abbreviations (or mixtures thereof), the sequences are presented in the N—>C direction in accordance with common convention.
- The abbreviations used for the genetically encoding nucleosides are conventional and are as follows: adenosine (A); guanosine (G); cytidine (C); thymidine (T); and uridine (U). Unless specifically delineated, the abbreviated nucleotides may be either ribonucleosides or 2′-deoxyribonucleosides. The nucleosides may be specified as being either ribonucleosides or 2′-deoxyribonucleosides on an individual basis or on an aggregate basis. When specified on an individual basis, the one-letter abbreviation is preceded by either a “d” or an “r,” where “d” indicates the nucleoside is a 2′-deoxyribonucleoside and “r” indicates the nucleoside is a ribonucleoside. For example, “dA” designates 2′-deoxyriboadenosine and “rA” designates riboadenosine. When specified on an aggregate basis, the particular nucleic acid or polynucleotide is identified as being either an RNA molecule or a DNA molecule. Nucleotides are abbreviated by adding a “p” to represent each phosphate, as well as whether the phosphates are attached to the 3′-position or the 5′-position of the sugar. Thus, 5′-nucleotides are abbreviated as “pN” and 3′-nucleotides are abbreviated as “Np,” where “N” represents A, G, C, T or U. When nucleic acid sequences are presented as a string of one-letter abbreviations, the sequences are presented in the 5′->3′ direction in accordance with common convention, and the phosphates are not indicated.
- Definitions
- As used throughout the instant application, the following terms shall have the following meanings:
- “Promoter” or “Promoter Sequence” refers to a DNA regulatory region capable of initiating transcription of a downstream (3′ direction) coding sequence. A promoter typically includes a transcription initiation site (conveniently defined, for example, by mapping with nuclease S1) and protein binding domains responsible for binding proteins that initiate transcription.
- “TGF-β Inducible Promoter” refers to a promoter that initiates transcription when a cell comprising a nucleic acid molecule including such a promoter is exposed to, or contacted with, TGF-β. While not intending to be bound by any particular theory of operation, it is believed that contacting a cell comprising such a promoter with TGF-β causes the activation of a DNA-binding protein that then binds the TGF-β inducible promoter and induces transcription of coding sequences downstream of the promoter
- An “α promoter” or a “germline α promoter” is a TGF-β inducible promoter that, when induced in a B-cell, leads to the production of IgA immunoglobulins. Such germline α promoters are well-known in the art. Such promoters may be endogenous to a cell, or alternatively, they may be engineered or exogenously supplied.
- “IL-4 inducible promoter” refers to a promoter that initiates transcription when a cell comprising a nucleic acid molecule including such a promoter is exposed to, or contacted with, IL-4 or IL-13. While not intending to be bound by any particular theory of operation, it is believed that contacting a cell comprising such a promoter with IL-4 (or IL-13) causes the activation of a DNA-binding protein that then binds the IL-4 inducible promoter and induces transcription of coding sequences downstream of the promoter.
- An “ε promoter” or a “germline ε promoter” is an IL-4 inducible promoter that, when induced in a B-cell, leads to the production of IgE immunoglobulins. Such IL-4 inducible germline ε promoters are well-known in the art. Such promoters may be endogenous to a cell or, alternatively, they may be engineered or supplied exogenously. A specific example of a germline ε promoter is the 603 bp IL-4 inducible fragment of the human promoter depicted in
FIG. 1 (SEQ ID NO:11). - A compound that “modulates an IL-4 inducible germline ε promoter” or that “modulates IL-4 induced germline ε transcription” has the ability to change or alter expression downstream of the germline ε promoter induced by IL-4 (or IL-13). The change in IL-4 induced downstream expression may occur at the mRNA (transcriptional) level or at the protein (translational) level. Hence, the change in IL-4 induced downstream expression may be monitored at the RNA level, for example by quantifying induced downstream transcription products, or at the protein level, for example by quantifying the amount or activity of induced downstream translation products. The compound may act to modulate the IL-4 inducible germline promoter via any mechanism of action. For example, the compound may act to modulate the IL-4 inducible germline promoter by interacting with or binding a DNA binding protein involved in the IL-4 induced transcription, or by interacting with or binding the IL-4 inducible germline ε promoter per se, or by interacting with or binding to a molecule that functions in the signalling cascade triggered by IL-4.
- A compound that “modulates IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production and/or accumulation” has the ability to change or alter the amount of IgE produced and/or accumulated by a B-cell activated via the IL-4 receptor with IL-4 (or IL-13 or other IL-4 receptor ligand) and, in some cases, a second signal known to cause, in combination with IL-4 (or IL-13), isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE. Such second signal may be, for example, anti-CD40 monoclonal antibodies (anti-CD40 mAbs), infection by Epstein-Barr virus or hydrocortisone. The compound may act to modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE production and/or accumulation via any mechanism of action. For example, the compound may act to modulate IL-4 induced germline ε transcription, and hence isotype switching, or the compound may act to modulate IgE production and/or accumulation in an already switched cell. An “IL-4 induced” activity includes activity (e.g., production of IgE, transcription of germline ε promoter isotype switching of B-cell) that is induced as a result of the binding of IL-4, IL-13 or other IL-4 receptor ligand to the IL-4 receptor.
- “Identifying” in the context of screening assays means determining whether a candidate compound unknown to possess a particular property of interest possesses the property of interest, as well as confirming that a compound thought or known to possess a particular property of interest possesses the property of interest.
- Compounds that “compete for binding with a AR02E8 compound” compete for binding to an adenosine kinase (defined in a later section) with an active AR02E8 compound of invention (described in more detail in a later section), such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS or peptide AR02E8VC, or with another compound that competes for binding to an adenosine kinase with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention. For example, if
compound 1 competes for binding to an adenosine kinase with an active AR02E8 compound and a candidate compound competes for binding to the adenosine kinase withcompound 1, then for purposes of the present invention, the candidate compound competes for binding with a AR02E8 compound. Where competition with a specific category of compound is intended, the modifiers “directly” and “indirectly” are used, where “directly” refers to competition with the stated compound and “indirectly” refers to competition with another compound that itself competes with the stated compound. - “Alkyl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a saturated or unsaturated, branched, straight-chain or cyclic monovalent hydrocarbon group having the stated number of carbon atoms (i.e., C1-C6 means from one to six carbon atoms) derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent alkane, alkene or alkyne. Typical alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl; ethyls such as ethanyl, ethenyl, ethynyl; propyls such as propan-1-yl, propan-2-yl, cyclopropan-1-yl, prop-1-en-1-yl, prop-1-en-2-yl, prop-2-en-1-yl (allyl), cycloprop-1-en-1-yl; cycloprop-2-en-1-yl, prop-1-yn-1-yl, prop-2-yn-1-yl, etc.; butyls such as butan-1-yl, butan-2-yl, 2-methyl-propan-1-yl, 2-methyl-propan-2-yl, cyclobutan-1-yl, but-1-en-1-yl, but-1-en-2-yl, 2-methyl-prop-1-en-1-yl, but-2-en-1-yl, but-2-en-2-yl, buta-1,3-dien-1-yl, buta-1,3-dien-2-yl, cyclobut-1-en-1-yl, cyclobut-1-en-3-yl, cyclobuta-1,3-dien-1-yl, but-1-yn-1-yl, but-1-yn-3-yl, but-3-yn-1-yl, etc.; and the like. The term “alkyl” is specifically intended to include groups having any degree or level of saturation, i.e., groups having exclusively single carbon-carbon bonds, groups having one or more double carbon-carbon bonds, groups having one or more triple carbon-carbon bonds and groups having mixtures of single, double and triple carbon-carbon bonds. Where a specific level of saturation is intended, the expressions “alkanyl,” “alkenyl,” and “alkynyl” are used. The expression “lower alkyl” refers to alkyl groups composed of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- “Alkanyl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a saturated branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group. Typical alkanyl groups include, but are not limited to, methanyl; ethanyl; propanyls such as propan-1-yl, propan-2-yl (isopropyl), cyclopropan-1-yl, etc.; butyanyls such as butan-1-yl, butan-2-yl (sec-butyl), 2-methyl-propan-1-yl (isobutyl), 2-methyl-propan-2-yl (t-butyl), cyclobutan-1-yl, etc.; and the like.
- “Alkenyl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an unsaturated branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group having at least one carbon-carbon double bond derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent alkene. The group may be in either the cis or trans conformation about the double bond(s). Typical alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethenyl; propenyls such as prop-1-en-1-yl, prop-1-en-2-yl, prop-2-en-1-yl (allyl), prop-2-en-2-yl, cycloprop-1-en-1-yl; cycloprop-2-en-1-yl; butenyls such as but-1-en-1-yl, but-1-en-2-yl, 2-methyl-prop-1-en-1-yl, but-2-en-1-yl, but-2-en-1-yl, but-2-en-2-yl, buta-1,3-dien-1-yl, buta-1,3-dien-2-yl, cyclobut-1-en-1-yl, cyclobut-1-en-3-yl, cyclobuta-1,3-dien-1-yl, etc.; and the like.
- “Alkynyl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an unsaturated branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent alkyne. Typical alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl; propynyls such as prop-1-yn-1-yl, prop-2-yn-1-yl, etc.; butynyls such as but-1-yn-1-yl, but-1-yn-3-yl, but-3-yn-1-yl, etc.; and the like.
- “Parent Aromatic Ring System” refers to an unsaturated cyclic or polycyclic ring system having a conjugated π electron system. Specifically included within the definition of “parent aromatic ring system” are fused ring systems in which one or more of the rings are aromatic and one or more of the rings are saturated or unsaturated, such as, for example, fluorene, indane, indene, phenalene, etc. Typical parent aromatic ring systems include, but are not limited to, aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexylene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, trinaphthalene, and the like.
- “Aryl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having the stated number of carbon ring atoms (i.e., C5-C14 means from 5 to 14 carbon ring atoms) derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexylene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, trinaphthalene, and the like. In preferred embodiments, the aryl group is (C5-C14) aryl, with (C5-C10) being even more preferred. Particularly preferred aryls are cyclopentadienyl, phenyl and naphthyl.
- “Arylalkyl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an acyclic alkyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl group. Typical arylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, 2-phenylethan-1-yl, 2-phenylethen-1-yl, naphthylmethyl, 2-naphthylethan-1-yl, 2-naphthylethen-1-yl, naphthobenzyl, 2-naphthophenylethan-1-yl and the like. Where specific alkyl moieties are intended, the nomenclature arylalkanyl, arylalkenyl and/or arylalkynyl is used. In preferred embodiments, the arylalkyl group is (C6-C16) arylalkyl, e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety of the arylalkyl group is (C1-C6) and the aryl moiety is (C5-C10). In particularly preferred embodiments the arylalkyl group is (C6-C13), e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety of the arylalkyl group is (C1-C3) and the aryl moiety is (C5-C10).
- “Parent Heteroaromatic Ring System” refers to a parent aromatic ring system in which one or more carbon atoms are each independently replaced with the same or different heteroatoms or heteroatomic groups. Typical heteroatoms or heteroatomic groups to replace the carbon atoms include, but are not limited to, N, NH, P, O, S, Si, etc. Specifically included within the definition of “parent heteroaromatic ring systems” are fused ring systems in which one or more of the rings are aromatic and one or more of the rings are saturated or unsaturated, such as, for example, arsindole, benzodioxan, benzofuran, chromane, chromene, indole, indoline, xanthene, etc. Also included in the definition of “parent heteroaromatic ring system” are those recognized rings that include substituents, such as benzopyrone. Typical parent heteroaromatic ring systems include, but are not limited to, arsindole, benzodioxan, benzofuran, benzopyrone, carbazole, β-carboline, chromane, chromene, cinnoline, furan, imidazole, indazole, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, isothiazole, isoxazole, naphthyridine, oxadiazole, oxazole, perimidine, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phthalazine, pteridine, purine, pyran, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrrole, pyrrolizine, quinazoline, quinoline, quinolizine, quinoxaline, tetrazole, thiadiazole, thiazole, thiophene, triazole, xanthene, and the like.
- “Heteroaryl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to a monovalent heteroaromatic group having the stated number of ring atoms (i.e., “5-14 membered” means from 5 to 14 ring atoms) derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single atom of a parent heteroaromatic ring system. Typical heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from acridine, arsindole, carbazole, β-carboline, chromane, chromene, cinnoline, furan, imidazole, indazole, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, isothiazole, isoxazole, naphthyridine, oxadiazole, oxazole, perimidine, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phthalazine, pteridine, purine, pyran, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrrole, pyrrolizine, quinazoline, quinoline, quinolizine, quinoxaline, tetrazole, thiadiazole, thiazole, thiophene, triazole, xanthene, and the like. In preferred embodiments, the heteroaryl group is a 5-14 membered heteroaryl, with 5-10 membered heteroaryl being particularly preferred.
- “Heteroarylalkyl” by itself or as part of another substituent refers to an acyclic alkyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, is replaced with a heteroaryl group. Where specific alkyl moieties are intended, the nomenclature heteroarylalkanyl, heteroarylalkenyl and/or heterorylalkynyl is used. In preferred embodiments, the heteroarylalkyl group is a 6-20 membered heteroarylalkyl, e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety of the heteroarylalkyl is 1-6 membered and the heteroaryl moiety is a 5-14-membered heteroaryl. In particularly preferred embodiments, the heteroarylalkyl is a 6-13 membered heteroarylalkyl, e.g., the alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl moiety is 1-3 membered and the heteroaryl moiety is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
- “Substituted Alkyl, Aryl, Arylalkyl, Heteroaryl or Heteroarylakyl” refers to an alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylakyl group in which one or more hydrogen atoms is replaced with another substituent group. Exemplary substituent groups include, but are not limited to, —OR′, —SR′, —NR′R′, —NO2, —NO, —CN, —CF3, halogen (e.g., —F, —Cl, —Br and —I), —C(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NR′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R′, where each R′ is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and (C1-C6) alkyl.
- The terms “percentage of sequence identity” and “percentage homology” are used interchangeably herein to refer to comparisons among polynucleotides and polypeptides, and are determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a comparison window, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage may be calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity. Alternatively, the percentage may be calculated by determining the number of positions at which either the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences or a nucleic acid base or amino acid residue is aligned with a gap to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity. Those of skill in the art appreciate that there are many established algorithms available to align two sequences. Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the GCG Wisconsin Software Package), or by visual inspection (see generally, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, F. M. Ausubel et al., eds., Current Protocols, a joint venture between Greene Publishing Associates, Inc. and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., (1995 Supplement) (Ausubel)). Examples of algorithms that are suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215: 403-410 and Altschul et al. (1977) Nucleic Acids Res. 3389-3402, respectively. Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information website. This algorithm involves first identifying high scoring sequence pairs (HSPs) by identifying short words of length W in the query sequence, which either match or satisfy some positive-valued threshold score T when aligned with a word of the same length in a database sequence. T is referred to as, the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al, supra). These initial neighborhood word hits act as seeds for initiating searches to find longer HSPs containing them. The word hits are then extended in both directions along each sequence for as far as the cumulative alignment score can be increased. Cumulative scores are calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always >0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always <0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score. Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached. The BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment. The BLASTN program (for nucleotide sequences) uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 11, an expectation (E) of 10, M=5, N=−4, and a comparison of both strands. For amino acid sequences, the BLASTP program uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 3, an expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff& Henikoff, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:10915 (1989)).
- While all of the above mentioned algorithms and programs are suitable for a determination of sequence alignment and % sequence identity, for determination of % sequence identity in connection with the present invention, the BESTFIT or GAP programs in the GCG Wisconsin Software package (Accelrys, Madison Wis.), using default parameters provided, are preferred.
- The AR02E8 Compounds
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention are generally peptides and/or peptides analogs which, as will be discussed in more detail below, are capable of modulating a variety of processes involved in IL-4 receptor-mediated isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE. The AR02E8 compounds of the invention are generally peptides or peptide analogs, or pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, that are from 8 to 30 residues in length and include a “core” peptide or peptide analog, comprising at least 8 consecutive amino acid residues, preferably at least 10 consecutive amino acid residues, more preferably at least 12 amino acid residues, according to structural formula (II):
(II) X1˜X2˜X3˜X4˜X5˜X6˜X7˜X8˜X9˜X10˜X11˜X12˜X13˜X14˜ X15˜X16˜X17˜X18˜X19˜X20˜X21˜X22˜X23 - wherein:
-
- X1 is an acidic residue;
- X2 is a hydroxyl-containing residue;
- X3 is a non-polar residue;
- X4 is a polar residue;
- X5 is an aliphatic residue;
- X6 is a polar residue;
- X7 is a cysteine-like residue;
- X8 is an aliphatic residue;
- X9 is an aliphatic residue;
- X10 is cysteine-like residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X11 is a basic residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X12 is a hydroxyl-containing residue, a small polar residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X13 is an aliphatic residue;
- X14 is an aromatic residue;
- X15 is an aliphatic residue;
- X16 is an aliphatic residue;
- X17 is an aliphatic residue;
- X18 is an aromatic residue;
- X19 is an aromatic residue;
- X20 is an acidic residue;
- X21 is an aliphatic residue;
- X22 is an aliphatic residue;
- X23 is a conformationally constrained residue.
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention include linear, branched and cyclic peptides and peptide analogs.
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention and/or the “core” peptides or peptide analogs of structure (II) are defined, in part, in terms of amino acids or residues bearing side chains belonging to certain designated classes. The definitions of the various classes of amino acids or residues that define structure (II), and hence the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, are as follows:
- “Hydrophilic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to an amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a hydrophobicity of less than zero according to the normalized consensus hydrophobicity scale of Eisenberg et al., 1984, J. Mol. Biol. 179:125-142. Genetically encoded hydrophilic amino acids include L-Thr (T), L-Ser (S), L-His (H), L-Glu (E), L-Asn (N), L-Gln (Q), L-Asp (D), L-Lys (K) and L-Arg (R).
- “Acidic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophilic amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a pK value of less than about 6 when the amino acid is included in a peptide or polypeptide. Acidic amino acids typically have negatively charged side chains at physiological pH due to loss of a hydrogen ion. Genetically encoded acidic amino acids include L-Glu (E) and L-Asp (D).
- “Basic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophilic amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a pK value of greater than about 6 when the amino acid is included in a peptide or polypeptide. Basic amino acids typically have positively charged side chains at physiological pH due to association with hydronium ion. Genetically encoded basic amino acids include L-His (H), L-Arg (R) and L-Lys (K).
- “Polar Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophilic amino acid or residue having a side chain that is uncharged at physiological pH, but which has at least one bond in which the pair of electrons shared in common by two atoms is held more closely by one of the atoms. Genetically encoded polar amino acids include L-Asn (N), L-Gln (Q), L-Ser (S) and L-Thr (T).
- “Hydrophobic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to an amino acid or residue having a side chain exhibiting a hydrophobicity of greater than zero according to the normalized consensus hydrophobicity scale of Eisenberg et al., 1984, J. Mol. Biol. 179:125-142. Genetically encoded hydrophobic amino acids include L-Pro (P), L-Ile (I), L-Phe (F), L-Val (V), L-Leu (L), L-Trp (W), L-Met (M), L-Ala (A) and L-Tyr (Y).
- “Aromatic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophilic or hydrophobic amino acid or residue having a side chain that includes at least one aromatic or heteroaromatic ring. The aromatic or heteroaromatic ring may contain one or more substituents such as —OH, —OR″, —SH, —SR″, —CN, halogen (e.g., —F, —Cl, —Br, —I), —NO2, —NO, —NH2, —NHR″, —NR″R″, —C(O)R″, —C(O)O−, —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR″, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NHR″, —C(O)NR″R″ and the like, where each R″ is independently (C1-C6) alkyl, substituted (C1-C6) alkyl, (C2-C6) alkenyl, substituted (C2-C6) alkenyl, (C2-C6) alkynyl, substituted (C2-C6) alkynyl, (C5-C10) aryl, substituted (C5-C10) aryl, (C6-C16) arylalkyl, substituted (C6-C16) arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl or substituted 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl. Genetically encoded aromatic amino acids include L-Phe (F), L-Tyr (Y) and L-Trp (W). Although owing to the pKa of its heteroaromatic nitrogen atom L-His (H) is classified above as a basic residue, as its side chain includes a heteroaromatic ring, it may also be classified as an aromatic residue.
- “Non-polar Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophobic amino acid or residue having a side chain that is uncharged at physiological pH and which has bonds in which the pair of electrons shared in common by two atoms is generally held equally by each of the two atoms (i.e., the side chain is not polar). Genetically encoded non-polar amino acids include L-Leu (L), L-Val (V), L-Ile (I), L-Met (M) and L-Ala (A).
- “Aliphatic Amino Acid or Residue” refers to a hydrophobic amino acid or residue having an aliphatic hydrocarbon side chain. Genetically encoded aliphatic amino acids include L-Ala (A), L-Val (V), L-Leu (L) and L-Ile (I).
- The amino acid L-Cys (C) is unusual in that it can form disulfide bridges with other L-Cys (C) amino acids or other sulfanyl- or sulfhydryl-containing amino acids. The “cysteine-like residues” include cysteine and other amino acids that contain sulfhydryl moieties that are available for formation of disulfide bridges. The ability of L-Cys (C) (and other amino acids with —SH containing side chains) to exist in a peptide in either the reduced free —SH or oxidized disulfide-bridged form affects whether L-Cys (C) contributes net hydrophobic or hydrophilic character to a peptide. While L-Cys (C) exhibits a hydrophobicity of 0.29 according to the normalized consensus scale of Eisenberg (Eisenberg et al., 1984, supra), it is to be understood that for purposes of the present invention L-Cys (C) is categorized as a polar hydrophilic amino acid, notwithstanding the general classifications defined above.
- The amino acid Gly (G) is also unusual in that it bears no side chain on its α-carbon and, as a consequence, contributes only a peptide bond to a particular peptide sequence. Moreover, owing to the lack of a side chain, it is the only genetically-encoded amino acid having an achiral α-carbon. Although Gly (G) exhibits a hydrophobicity of 0.48 according to the normalized consensus scale of Eisenberg (Eisenberg et al., 1984, supra), for purposes of the present invention, Gly is categorized as an aliphatic amino acid or residue.
- Owing in part to its conformationally constrained nature, the amino acid L-Pro (P) is also unusual. Although it is categorized herein as a hydrophobic amino acid or residue, it will typically occur in positions near the N- and/or C-termini so as not to deleteriously affect the structure of the AR02E8 compounds. However, as will be appreciated by skilled artisans, AR02E8 compounds may include L-Pro (P) or other similar “conformationally constrained” residues at internal positions.
- “Small Amino Acid or Residue” refers to an amino acid or residue having a side chain that is composed of a total three or fewer carbon and/or heteroatoms (excluding the α-carbon and hydrogens). The small amino acids or residues may be further categorized as aliphatic, non-polar, polar or acidic small amino acids or residues, in accordance with the above definitions. Genetically-encoded small amino acids include Gly, L-Ala (A), L-Val (V), L-Cys (C), L-Asn (N), L-Ser (S), L-Thr (T) and L-Asp (D).
- “Hydroxyl-containing residue” refers to an amino acid containing a hydroxyl (—OH) moiety. Genetically-encoded hydroxyl-containing amino acids include L-Ser (S) L-Thr (T) and L-Tyr (Y).
- As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, the above-defined categories are not mutually exclusive. Indeed, the delineated category of small amino acids includes amino acids from all of the other delineated categories except the aromatic category. Thus, amino acids having side chains exhibiting two or more physico-chemical properties can be included in multiple categories. As a specific example, amino acid side chains having heteroaromatic moieties that include ionizable heteroatoms, such as His, may exhibit both aromatic properties and basic properties, and can therefore be included in both the aromatic and basic categories. The appropriate classification of any amino acid or residue will be apparent to those of skill in the art, especially in light of the detailed disclosure provided herein.
- While the above-defined categories have been exemplified in terms of the genetically encoded amino acids, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are not restricted to the genetically encoded amino acids. Indeed, in addition to the genetically encoded amino acids, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be comprised, either in whole or in part, of naturally-occurring and/or synthetic non-encoded amino acids. Certain commonly encountered non-encoded amino acids of which the cyclic compounds of the invention may be comprised include, but are not limited to: the D-enantiomers of the genetically-encoded amino acids; 2,3-diaminopropionic acid (Dpr); α-aminoisobutyric acid (Aib); ε-aminohexanoic acid (Aha); δ-aminovaleric acid (Ava); N-methylglycine or sarcosine (MeGly or Sar); ornithine (Orn); citrulline (Cit); t-butylalanine (Bua); t-butylglycine (Bug); N-methylisoleucine (MeIle); phenylglycine (Phg); cyclohexylalanine (Cha); norleucine (Nle); naphthylalanine (Nal); 2-chlorophenylalanine (Ocf); 3-chlorophenylalanine (Mcf); 4-chlorophenylalanine (Pcf); 2-fluorophenylalanine (Off); 3-fluorophenylalanine (Mff); 4-fluorophenylalanine (Pff); 2-bromophenylalanine (Obf); 3-bromophenylalanine (Mbf); 4-bromophenylalanine (Pbf); 2-methylphenylalanine (Omf); 3-methylphenylalanine (Mmf); 4-methylphenylalanine (Pmf); 2-nitrophenylalanine (Onf); 3-nitrophenylalanine (Mnf); 4-nitrophenylalanine (Pnf); 2-cyanophenylalanine (Ocf); 3-cyanophenylalanine (Mcf); 4-cyanophenylalanine (Pcf); 2-trifluoromethylphenylalanine (Otf); 3-trifluoromethylphenylalanine (Mtf); 4-trifluoromethylphenylalanine (Ptf); 4-aminophenylalanine (Paf); 4-iodophenylalanine (Pif); 4-aminomethylphenylalanine (Pamf); 2,4-dichlorophenylalanine (Opef); 3,4-dichlorophenylalanine (Mpcf); 2,4-difluorophenylalanine (Opff); 3,4-difluorophenylalanine (Mpff); pyrid-2-ylalanine (2pAla); pyrid-3-ylalanine (3pAla); pyrid-4-ylalanine (4pAla); naphth-1-ylalanine (1nAla); naphth-2-ylalanine (2nAla); thiazolylalanine (taAla); benzothienylalanine (bAla); thienylalanine (tAla); furylalanine (fAla); homophenylalanine (hPhe); homotyrosine (hTyr); homotryptophan (hTrp); pentafluorophenylalanine (5ff); styrylkalanine (sAla); authrylalanine (aAla); 3,3-diphenylalanine (Dfa); 3-amino-5-phenypentanoic acid (Afp); penicillamine (Pen); 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid (Tic); β-2-thienylalanine (Thi); methionine sulfoxide (Mso); N(w)-nitroarginine (nArg); homolysine (hLys); phosphonomethylphenylalanine (pmPhe); phosphoserine (pSer); phosphothreonine (pThr); homoaspartic acid (hAsp); homoglutanic acid (hGlu); 1-aminocyclopent-(2 or 3)-ene-4 carboxylic acid; pipecolic acid (PA), azetidine-3-carboxylic acid (ACA); 1-aminocyclopentane-3-carboxylic acid; allylglycine (aOly); propargylglycine (pgGly); homoalanine (hAla); norvaline (nVal); homoleucine (hLeu), homovaline (hVal); homoisolencine (hIle); homoarginine (hArg); N-acetyl lysine (AcLys); 2,4-diaminobutyric acid (Dbu); 2,3-diaminobutyric acid (Dab); N-methylvaline (MeVal); homocysteine (hCys); homoserine (hSer); hydroxyproline (Hyp) and homoproline (hPro). Additional non-encoded amino acids of which the compounds of the invention may be comprised will be apparent to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., the various amino acids provided in Fasman, 1989, CRC Practical Handbook of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla., at pp. 3-70 and the references cited therein, all of which are incorporated by reference). These amino acids may be in either the L- or D-configuration.
- Those of skill in the art will recognize that amino acids or residues bearing side chain protecting groups may also comprise the AR02E8 compounds of the invention. Non-limiting examples of such protected amino acids, which in this case belong to the aromatic category, include (protecting groups listed in parentheses), but are not limited to: Arg(tos), Cys(methylbenzyl), Cys (nitropyridinesulfenyl), Glu(δ-benzylester), Gln(xanthyl), Asn(N-δ-xanthyl), His(bom), His(benzyl), His(tos), Lys(fmoc), Lys(tos), Ser(O-benzyl), Thr (O-benzyl) and Tyr(O-benzyl).
- Non-encoding amino acids that are conformationally constrained of which the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be composed include, but are not limited to, N-methyl amino acids (L-configuration); 1-aminocyclopent-(2 or 3)-ene-4-carboxylic acid; pipecolic acid; azetidine-3-carboxylic acid; homoproline (hPro); and 1-aminocyclopentane-3-carboxylic acid.
- The classifications of the genetically encoded and certain common non-encoded amino acids according to the categories defined above are summarized in TABLE 1, below. It is to be understood that TABLE 1 is for illustrative purposes only and does not purport to be an exhaustive list of amino acids that can comprise the AR02E8 compounds of the invention. Other amino acids not specifically mentioned herein can be readily categorized based on their observed physical and chemical properties in light of the definitions provided herein.
TABLE 1 Encoded and Certain Common Non-Encoded Amino Acid Classifications Classi- fication Encoded Amino Acids Non-encoded Amino Acids Hydrophobic Aromatic F, Y, W, H f, y, w, h, Phg, Nal, Thi, Tic, Pcf, Off, Mff, Pff, hPhe Non-Polar L, V, I, M, G, A, P l, v, i, m, g, a, p, Bua, Bug, MeIle, Nle, MeVal, Cha, MeGly, Aib Aliphatic A, V, L, I a, v, l, i, Dpr, Aib, Aha, MeGly, Bua, Bug, Mele, Cha, Nle, MeVal Hydrophilic Acidic D, E d, e Basic H, K, R h, k, r, Dpr, Orn, hArg, Paf, Dbu, Dab Polar C, Q, N, S, T c, q, n, s, t, Cit, AcLys, Mso, hSer Small G, A, V, C, N, S, T, D g, a, v, c, n, s, t, d - In the “core” peptides and peptide analogs of structure (II), the symbol “˜” between each specified residue Xn designates a backbone constitutive linking moiety. When the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are peptides, each “˜” between the various Xn represents an amide or peptide linkage of the following polarity: —C(O)—NH—. It is to be understood, however, that the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include analogs of peptides in which one or more amide or peptide linkages are replaced with a linkage other than an amide or peptide linkage, such as a substituted amide linkage, an isostere of an amide linkage, or a peptido or amide mimetic linkage. Thus, when used in connection with defining the various Xn comprising the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, the term “residue” refers to the Cα carbon and side chain moiety(ies) of the designated amino acid or class of amino acid. As a specific example, defining X1 as being a “Gly residue” means that X1 is CαH2. Defining X1 as being an “Ala residue” means that X1 is CαHCH3 in which the Cα carbon is in either the D- or L-configuration. Defining X1 as being an “A residue” means that X1 is CαHCH3 in which the Cα carbon is in the L-configuration.
- Substituted amide linkages that may be included in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, groups of the formula —C(O)NR2, where R2 is (C1-C6) alkyl, (C5-C10) aryl, substituted (C5-C10) aryl, (C6-C16) arylalkyl, substituted (C6-C16) arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl or substituted 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl. In a specific embodiment, R2 is (C1-C6) alkanyl, (C2-C6) alkenyl, (C2-C6) alkynyl or phenyl.
- Isosteres of amides that may be included in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention generally include, but are not limited to, —NR3—SO—, —NR3—S(O)2—, —CH2—CH2—, —CH═CH— (cis and trans), —CH2—NH—, —CH2—S—, —CH2—O—, —C(O)—CH2—, —CH(OH)—CH2— and —CH2—S(O)2—, where R3 is hydrogen or R2 and R2 is as previously defined. These interlinkages may be included in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention in either the depicted polarity or in the reverse polarity. Peptide analogs including such non-amide linkages, as well as methods of synthesizing such analogs, are well-known. See, for example, Spatola, 1983, “Peptide Backbone Modifications,” In: Chemistry and Biochemistry of Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins, Weinstein, Ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, pp. 267-357 (general review); Morley, 1980, Trends Pharm. Sci. 1:463-468; Hudson et al., 1979, Int. J. Prot. Res. 14:177-185 (—CH2—NH—, —CH2—CH2); Spatola et al, 1986, Life Sci. 38:1243-1249; Spatola, 1983, “Peptide Backbone Modifications: the Ψ[CH2S] Moiety as an Amide Bond Replacement,” In: Peptides: Structure and Function V, J. Hruby and D. H. Rich, Eds., Pierce Chemical Co., Rockford, Ill., pp. 341-344 (—CH2—S—); Hann, 1982, J. Chem. Soc. Parkin Trans. I. 1:307-314 (—CH═CH—, cis and trans); Almquist et al., 1980, J. Med. Chem. 23:1392-1398 (—C(O)—CH2—); European Patent Application EP 45665; Chemical Abstracts CA 97:39405 (—CH(OH)—CH2—); Holladay et al., 1983, Tetrahedron Lett. 24:4401-4404 (—CH(OH)—CH2—); and Hruby, 1982, Life Sci. 31:189-199 (—CH2—S—).
- Alternatively, one or more amide linkages may be replaced with peptidomimetic and/or amide mimetic moieties. Non-limiting examples of such moities are described in Olson et al., 1993, J. Med. Chem. 36:3039-3049; Ripka & Rich, 1998, Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2:441-452; Borchardt et al., 1997, Adv. Drug. Deliv. Rev. 27:235-256 and the various references cited therein.
- While structure (II) contains 23 specified residue positions, it is to be understood that the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may contain fewer than 23 residues. Indeed, truncated forms of structure (II) containing as few as 8 residues that retain one or more of the utilities described herein are considered to be within the scope of the present invention. Truncated forms of the compounds of structure (II) are obtained by deleting one or more residues from either or both termini. Preferred truncated forms of structure (II) will contain at least 10 residues; more preferred truncated forms of structure (II) will contain at least 12 to at least 16 residues.
- The core peptides or peptide analogs of structure (II) may also be extended at one or both termini. Typically, such extensions will range from about 1 to about 5 residues, but may be even longer, so long as the compound retains one or more of the utilities described herein. For example, one or both termini may be extended by 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or even more residues.
- In one embodiment of the invention, the extension has a sequence that corresponds to a sequence of a signal peptide capable of effecting transport across membranes, such that the AR02E8 compound is a “fusion polypeptide.” Such fusion polypeptides are particularly advantageous for administering to cells AR02E8 compounds of the invention that may not readily traverse cell membranes. The signal sequence may be fused to either the N-terminal or C-terminal portion of the AR02E8 compound, depending upon the characteristics of the particular signal sequence selected. Signal sequences capable of transporting molecules into cells are well-known in the art. Any of these sequences may be used in connection with the AR02E8 compounds of the invention. Specific examples of such sequences include HIV Tat sequences (see, e.g., Fawell et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:664; Frankel et al., 1988, Cell 55:1189; Savion et al., 1981, J. Biol. Chem. 256:1149; Derossi et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:10444; Baldin et al., 1990, EMBO J. 9:1511; U.S. Pat. No. 5,804,604; U.S. Pat. No. 5,670,617; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,652,122, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference), antennapedia sequences (see, e.g., Garcia-Echeverria et al., 2001, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 11:1363-1366; Prochiantz, 1999, Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 886:172-179; Prochiantz, 1996, Curr. Opin. Neurobiol. 6:629-634; U.S. Pat. No. 6,080,724, and the references cited in all of the above, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference) and poly(Arg) or poly(Lys) chains of 5-10 residues. Additional non-limiting examples of specific sequences can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,248,558; U.S. Pat. No. 6,043,339; U.S. Pat. No. 5,807,746 U.S. Pat. No. 6,251,398; U.S. Pat. No. 6,184,038 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,735, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- The terminus of the AR02E8 compounds of the invention corresponding to the amino terminus, if present, may be in the “free” form (e.g., H2N—), or alternatively may be acylated with a group of the formula R2 C(O)— or R2S(O)2—, wherein R2 is as previously defined. In one embodiment, R2 is selected from the group consisting of (C1-C6) alkyl, (C5-C10) aryl, (C6-C16) arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl. In a specific embodiment, the R2 group is a group that facilitates entry of the AR02E8 compound into a cell. Such groups are well-known in the art.
- In another embodiment, the amino terminus may be “blocked” with a blocking group designed to impart the AR02E8 compound with specified properties, such as a low antigenicity. Non-limiting examples of such blocking groups include polyalkylene oxide polymers such as polyethylene glycol (PEG). A variety of polymers useful for imparting compounds, and in particular peptides and proteins, with specified properties are known in the art, as are chemistries suitable for attaching such polymers to the compounds. Specific non-limiting examples may be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,643,575; 5,730,990; 5,902,588; 5,919,455; 6,113,906; 6,153,655; and 6,177,087, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Of course, skilled artisans will appreciate that any of these transport-effecting, acylating and/or blocking groups may also be attached to a side chain moiety of a AR02E8 compound. Residues having appropriate functionalities for attaching such groups will be apparent to those of skill in the art, and include, by way of example and not limitation, Cys, Lys, Asp and Glu.
- The terminus of the AR02E8 compounds corresponding to the C-terminus, if present, may be in the form of an underivatized carboxyl group, either as the free acid or as a salt, such as a sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium salt or other salt of an inorganic or organic ion, or may be in the form of a derivatized carboxyl, such as an ester, thioester or amide. Such derivatized forms of the compounds may be prepared by reacting a AR02E8 compound having a carboxyl terminus with an appropriate alcohol, thiol or amine. Suitable alcohols, thiols or amines include, by way of example and not limitation, alcohols of the formula R2OH, thiols of the formula R2SH and amines of the formula R2NH2, R2R2NH or NH3, where each R2 is, independently of the others, as previously defined.
- The C-terminus may also include transport-effecting or other blocking groups, such as those described above.
- As will be recognized by skilled artisans, the various Xn residues comprising the AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be in either the L- or D-configuration about their Cα carbons. In one embodiment, all of the Cα carbons of a particular AR02E8 compound are in the same configuration. In some embodiments of the invention, the AR02E8 compounds comprise specific chiralities about one or more Cα carbon(s) and/or include non-peptide linkages at specified locations so as to impart the AR02E8 compound with specified properties. For example, it is well-known that peptides composed in whole or in part of D-amino acids are more resistant to proteases than their corresponding L-peptide counterparts. Thus, in one embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds are peptides composed in whole or in part of D-amino acids. Alternatively, AR02E8 compounds having good stability against proteases may include peptide analogs including peptide linkages of reversed polarity at specified positions. For example, AR02E8 compounds having stability against tryptic-like proteases include peptide analogs having peptide linkages of reversed polarity before each L-Arg or L-Lys residue; AR02E8 compounds having stability against chymotrypsin-like proteases include peptide analogs having peptide linkages of reversed polarity before each small and medium-sized L-aliphatic residue or L-non-polar residue. In another embodiment, AR02E8 compounds having stability against proteases include peptide analogs composed wholly of peptide bonds of reversed polarity. Other embodiments having stability against proteases will be apparent to those of skill in the art. Additional specific embodiments of the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are described below.
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention can be in a linear form or a cyclic form, with or without branching. The cyclic forms can be cyclized via the terminal groups or via side chain groups on internal or terminal residues, through covalent or non-covalent linkages. Additional linking groups may also be present to facilitate cyclization.
- In one specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are 23-residue peptides or peptide analogs according to structural formula (III):
(III) Z1˜X1˜X2˜X3˜X4˜X5˜X6˜X7˜X8˜X9˜X10˜X11˜X12˜X13˜X14˜ X15˜X16˜X17˜X18˜X19˜X20˜X21˜X22˜X23˜Z4
wherein: - each X1 through X23 is as previously defined for structure (II);
- Z3 is H2N—, R4HN— or R4C(O)NH—;
- Z4 is —C(O)O−, —C(O)OR4, —C(O)NHR4 or —C(O)NH2;
- each R4 is independently (C1-C6) alkyl or (C1-C6) alkanyl; each “˜” is independently an amide linkage, a substituted amide linkage or an isostere of an amide linkage; and
- each “−” represents a bond.
- In another specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are compounds according to structural formula (III) in which each “˜” is an amide linkage.
- In yet another specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are compounds according to structural formula (III) in which:
-
- X1 is L-Asp;
- X2 is L-Thr;
- X3 is L-Met;
- X4 is L-Gln;
- X5 is L-Val;
- X6 is L-Gln;
- X7 is L-Cys;
- X8 is Gly;
- X9 is a small aliphatic residue;
- X10 is cysteine-like residue or an aliphatic residue;
- X11 is a basic residue or a small aliphatic residue;
- X12 is a hydroxyl-containing residue, or a small aliphatic residue;
- X13 is Gly;
- X14 is L-Tyr;
- X15 is L-Val;
- X16 is L-Val;
- X17 is L-Ala;
- X18 is L-Phe;
- X19 is L-Trp;
- X20 is L-Asp;
- X21 is L-Val;
- X22 is Gly;
- X23 is L-Pro.
Preferably, X9 is L-Val or L-Ala, X10 is L-Cys or Gly, X11 is L-Arg or L-Ala and/or X12 is L-Ser or Gly.
- In another specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention include compounds according to structural formula IV, and variants of such compounds of formula IV in which 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the amino acids set forth in formula IV, preferably one or two of the amino acid residues set forth in IV, are replaced by another amino acid selected from the same class (as described herein) as the original amino acid or by an Ala or a Gly residue:
(IV) Z1-D˜T˜M˜Q˜V˜Q˜C˜G˜V˜C˜R˜S˜G˜Y˜V˜V˜A˜F˜W˜D˜V˜G˜P- Z2 - wherein “−”, “˜”, Z1 and Z2 are as defined previously for formula (I).
- In still another specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are selected from the group consisting of DTMQVQCGVCRSGYVVAFWDVGP (SEQ ID NO:1), DTMQVQCGAGRSGYVVAFWDVGP (SEQ ID NO:2), DTMQVQCGVCAGGYVVAFWDVGP (SEQ ID NO:3), and analogs and protease-resistant analogs thereof.
- Active AR02E8 compounds of the invention are those that modulate, and in particular inhibit or downregulate, IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation and/or processes associated therewith. The AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be assessed for such activity in any standard assay that assesses the ability of a compound to modulate IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation. For example, a AR02E8 compound of the invention may be administered to a human or animal B-cell (e.g, primary B cells from blood, tonsils, spleens and other lymphoid tissues) stimulated with IL-4 (available from Pharmingen, Hamburg, Germany) and anti-CD40 mAbs (available from Ancell Corporation, Bayport Minn.) and the amount of IgE produced measured, for example, by an ELISA technique, such as the ELISA technique described in Worm et al., 1998, Blood 92:1713. The ELISA technique can use, for example, murine anti human IgE, biotinylated anti human IgE and streptavidin biotinylated horseradish peroxidase complex. Specific ELISA assays and techniques that may be used are provided in the Examples section. Particular active AR02E8 compounds include without limitation AR02E8wt, AR02E8VC and AR02E8RS.
- For AR02E8 compounds that readily traverse cell membranes, the compound may be administered to the cell by contacting the cell with the compound. AR02E8 compounds composed wholly of genetically-encoded amino acids that do not readily traverse cell membranes may be administered to the cell using well-known delivery techniques. In one embodiment, such AR02E8 compounds may be administered using well-known retroviral vectors and infection techniques pioneered by Richard Mulligan and David Baltimore with Psi-2 lines and analogous retroviral packaging systems based upon NIH 3T3 cells (see Mann et al., 1993, Cell 33:153-159, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference). Such helper-defective packaging cell lines are capable of producing all of the necessary trans proteins (gag, pol and env) required for packaging, processing, reverse transcribing and integrating genomes. Those RNA molecules that have in cis the Ψ packaging signal are packaged into maturing retrovirions. Virtually any of the art-known retroviral vectors and/or transfection systems may be used. Specific non-limiting examples of suitable transfection systems include those described in WO 97/27213; WO 97/27212; Choate et al., 1996, Human Gene Therapy 7:2247-2253; Kinsella et al., 1996, Human Gene Therapy 7:1405-1413; Hofmann et al, 1996, Proc. Natl. Acac. Sci. USA 93:5185-5190; Kitamura et al., 1995, Proc. Natl. Acac. Sci. USA 92:9146-9150; WO 94/19478; Pear et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acac. Sci. USA 90:8392-8396; Mann et al., 1993, Cell 33:153-159 and the references cited in all of the above, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Specific non-limiting examples of suitable retroviral vector systems include vectors based upon murine stem cell virus (MSCV) as described in Hawley et al., 1994, Gene Therapy 1:136-138; vectors based upon a modified MFG virus as described in Rivere et al., 1995, Genetics 92:6733; pBABE as described in WO 97/27213 and WO 97/27212; and the vectors depicted in FIG. 11 of WO 01/34806, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other suitable vectors and/or transfection techniques are discussed in connection with gene therapy administration, infra.
- A specific assay for assessing IL-4 induced IgE production that may be used to assay AR02E8 compounds of the invention is described in Worm et al., 2001, Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 124:233-236. Generally, a AR02E8 compound modulates IL-4 induced IgE production if it yields an increase or decrease in measured IgE levels of at least about 25% as compared to control cells (i.e., cells activated with IL-4+ anti-CD40 Mabs but not exposed to the AR02E8 compound). AR02E8 compounds that increase IL-4 induced IgE production are IgE agonists whereas AR02E8 compounds that decrease IL-4 induced IgE production are IgE antagonists. Skilled artisans will appreciate that AR02E8 compounds that inhibit greater levels of IL-4 induced IgE production, for example on the order of 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or even more as compared to control cells, are particularly desirable. Thus, while compounds that inhibit at least about 25% of IL-4 induced IgE production as compared to control cells are active, compounds that inhibit at least about 50%, 75% or even more IL-4 induced IgE production as compared to control cells are preferred.
- In another embodiment, AR02E8 compounds may be assayed for the ability to modulate IL-4 induced transcription of a germline promoter. Generally, such assays involve administering a AR02E8 compound to an IL-4 induced cell comprising an IL-4 inducible germline ε promoter and assessing the amount of gene expression (i.e. transcription) downstream of the ε promoter. Depending upon the ability of the AR02E8 compound to traverse cell membranes, it may be administered to the cell by contacting the cell with the compound or (for peptide compounds) via the retroviral transfection techniques described supra. The amount of the downstream gene expression may be assessed at the mRNA level, for example by quantifying the amount of a downstream transcription product produced, or at the translation level, for example by quantifying the amount of a downstream translation product produced. In one embodiment, the germline ε promoter is operably linked to a reporter gene that encodes a protein that produces an observable and/or detectable signal, such as a fluorescent protein. Specific examples of suitable assays for assessing AR02E8 compounds for the ability to modulate germline ε transcription are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707, WO 01/34806, WO 99/58663, commonly owned copending application Ser. No. 09/712,821, filed Nov. 13, 2000 and commonly owned copending application Ser. No. 09/076,624, filed May 12, 1998, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Generally, a AR02E8 compound modulates germline ε transcription if it yields an increase or decrease in measured downstream expression of at least about 25% as compared to control cells activated with IL-4 but not exposed to the AR02E8 compound. AR02E8 compounds that increase downstream expression are IL-4 agonists, whereas compounds that decrease (i.e. inhibit) downstream expression are IL-4 antagonists. Skilled artisans will appreciate that AR02E8 compounds that inhibit greater levels of IL-4 induced germline ε transcription, for example on the order of 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or even more as compared to control cells, are particularly desirable. Thus, while compounds that inhibit at least about 25% of IL-4 induced germline ε transcription as compared to control cells are active, compounds that inhibit at least about 50%, 75% or even more IL-4 induced germline ε transcription as compared to control cells are preferred. In one embodiment of the invention, active AR02E8 compounds are those that exhibit a reporter ratio of ≧1.1 in the A5T4 reporter line screening assay described in the examples section. In general, the “reporter ratio” is the ratio of the signal from a reporter under control of the ε promoter in the absence of a AR02E8 compound to that in the presence of the AR02E8 compound. In particular, for screening in the A5T4 reporter line that has been transformed with the inhibitor peptide vector, the reporter ratio can be determined from the ratio of the GFP fluorescence of IL-4 stimulated cells in the presence of doxycycline or tetracycline (i.e., when expression of the peptide is repressed) to the GFP fluorescence of IL-4 stimulated cells in the absence of doxycycline or tetracycline.
- As mentioned previously, B-cells initially produce IgD and IgM immunoglobulins and, when induced by the proper cytokines, produce IgEs. B-cells can be induced to produce other types of immunoglobulins, such as IgGs and IgAs, as well. For example, in the presence of the cytokine interleukin-2 (IL-2), B-cells produce IgG1; in the presence of a combination of IL-2 and TGF-β, B-cells produce IgA. In many situations, it is desirable to selectively modulate (increase or decrease) the production of a single immunoglobulin isotype, as such specificity permits the ability to treat or prevent diseases associated with the production and/or accumulation of the specified immunoglobulin isotype without affecting the immune system generally. Thus, in one embodiment, the AR02E8 compounds specifically modulate IL-4 induced germline ε transcription or IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation. By “specific” is meant that the AR02E8 compound modulates IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation or IL-4 induced germline ε transcription but does not significantly affect the production and/or accumulation of another immunoglobulin, or transcription of the promoter of another Ig isotype. In a particular embodiment, an AR02E8 compound specifically inhibits IL-4 induced germline ε transcription or IL-4 induced IgE production or accumulation. Such AR02E8 compound does not significantly inhibit production and/or accumulation of another Ig isotype, or transcription of another Ig isotype promoter, if the observed inhibition of the other Ig isotype in an appropriate assay is on the order of 10% or less as compared to control cells. Such specificity may be with respect to a single Ig isotype, or may be with respect to one or more Ig isotypes. For example, a AR02E8 compound may be assessed for specificity by assaying its ability to inhibit, for example, IgA production and/or accumulation or to inhibit germline α transcription in assays similar to those described above, except that the cells are activated with effectors suitable for IgA switching and synthesis and amount of IgA produced or the amount of expression downstream of a germline α promoter is assessed. Specific, non-limiting examples of AR02E8 compounds that specifically inhibit IL-4 induced IgE production and/or IL-4 induced germline ε transcription include peptides AR02E8wt, AR02E8RS and AR02E8VC.
- As will be discussed in more detail below, it has been discovered that the ability of certain AR02E8 compounds to inhibit IL-4 induced IgE production and/or IL-4 induced germline ε transcription is mediated by binding a adenosine kinase (AK). Accordingly, AR02E8 compounds may also be assessed for activity based upon their ability to bind an AK using, for example, any of the AK binding assays described infra. Generally, active AR02E8 compounds are those having a binding constant (Kd) on the order of 10 mM or less, with Kds in the range of 100 μM, 10 μM, 1 μM, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower, being preferred. Alternatively, active AR02E8 compounds are those that compete for binding an AK with another active AR02E8 compound. In a specific embodiment, the AR02E8 compound competes for binding an AK with peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS or peptide AR02E8VC. The ability of a AR02E8 compound to compete for binding an AK with another AR02E8 compound may be assessed using conventional competitive binding assay techniques. Generally, active AR02E8 compounds are those that exhibit an IC50 in the range of 1 mM or lower, with IC50s in the range of 100 μM, 10 μM, 1 μM, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower, in such competitive binding assays being preferred.
- Chemical Synthesis of the AR02E8 Compounds
- AR02E8 compounds of the invention may be prepared using standard techniques of organic synthesis. AR02E8 compounds that are peptides may be prepared using conventional step-wise solution or solid phase synthesis (see, e.g., Chemical Approaches to the Synthesis of Peptides and Proteins, Williams et al., Eds., 1997, CRC Press, Boca Raton Fla., and references cited therein; FMOC Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis: A Practical Approach, Chan & White, Eds., 2000, IRL Press, Oxford, England, and references cited therein).
- Alternatively, AR02E8 compounds, may be prepared by way of segment condensation, as described, for example, in Liu et al., 1996, Tetrahedron Lett. 37(7):933-936; Baca et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:1881-1887; Tam et al., 1995, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 45:209-216; Schnolzer and Kent, 1992, Science 256:221-225; Liu and Tam, 1994, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 116(10):4149-4153; Liu and Tam, 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:6584-6588; Yamashiro and Li, 1988, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 31:322-334. The condensation technique is particularly useful for synthesizing AR02E8 compounds comprising Gly residues. Other methods useful for synthesizing the AR02E8 compounds of the invention are described in Nakagawa et al., 1985, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:7087-7092. AR02E8 compounds that are peptide analogs may be synthesized using the various methods described in the references cited in connection with amide isosteres and amide and peptidomimetics, supra.
- AR02E8 compounds containing N- and/or C-terminal blocking groups can be prepared using standard techniques of organic chemistry. For example, methods for acylating the N-terminus of a peptide or amidating or esterifying the C-terminus of a peptide are well-known in the art. Modes of carrying other modifications at the N- and/or C-terminus will be apparent to those of skill in the art, as will modes of protecting any side-chain functionalities as may be necessary to attach terminal blocking groups.
- Formation of disulfide linkages, if desired, is generally conducted in the presence of mild oxidizing agents. Chemical oxidizing agents may be used, or the compounds may simply be exposed to atmospheric oxygen to effect these linkages. Various methods are known in the art, including those described, for example, by Tam et al, 1979, Synthesis 955-957; Stewart et al., 1984, Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, 2d Ed., Pierce Chemical Company Rockford, Ill.; Ahmed et al., 1975, J. Biol. Chem. 250:8477-8482; and Pennington et al., 1991 Peptides 1990 164-166, Giralt and Andreu, Eds., ESCOM Leiden, The Netherlands. An additional alternative is described by Kamber et al., 1980, Helv. Chim. Acta 63:899-915. A method conducted on solid supports is described by Albericio, 1985, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 26:92-97. Any of these methods may be used to form disulfide linkages in the AR02E8 compounds of the invention.
- Cyclic peptides may be prepared or may result from the formation of single or multiple disulfide bonds, other side-chains or head-to-tail cyclizations, either directly or by way of an optional linker. The cyclic peptides may be prepared using any art-known techniques for the preparation of cyclic peptides and cyclic peptide analogs. For example, the peptide or peptide analog may be prepared in linear or non-cyclized form using conventional solution or solid phase peptide and/or peptide analog syntheses and cyclized using standard chemistries. The linear polypeptides can be cyclized with a linking group between the two termini, between one terminus and the side chain of an amino acid in the peptide or peptide derivative, or between the side chains to two amino acids in the peptide or peptide derivative. Suitable procedures for synthesizing the peptide and peptide analogs described herein, as well as suitable chemistries for cyclizing such compounds, are well known in the art. For references related to synthesis of cyclic peptides the reader is referred to Tam et al., 2000, Biopolymers 52:311-332; Camamero et al, 1998, Angew. Chem. Intl. Ed. 37: 347-349; Tam et al., 1998, Prot. Sci. 7:1583-1592; Jackson et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:819-820; Dong et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:2726-2731; Ishida et al., 1995, J. Org. Chem. 60:5374-5375; WO 95/33765, published Jun. 6, 1995; Xue and DeGrado, 1994, J. Org. Chem. 60(4):946-952; Jacquier et al., 1991, In: Peptides 1990 221-222, Giralt and Andreu, Eds., ESCOM Leiden, The Netherlands; Schmidt and Neubert, 1991, In: Peptides 1990 214-215, Giralt and Andreu, Eds., ESCOM Leiden, The Netherlands; Toniolo, 1990, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 35:287-300; Ulysse et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 117:8466-8467; Durr et al., 1991, Peptides 1990 216-218, Giralt and Andreu, Eds., ESCOM Leiden, The Netherlands; Lender et al, 1993, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 42:509-517; Boger and Yohannes, 1990, J. Org. Chem. 55:6000-6017; Brady et al., 1979, J. Org. Chem. 4(18):3101-3105; Spatola et al., 1986, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 108:825-831; Seidel et al., 1991, In: Peptides 1990 236-237, Giralt and Andreu, Eds., ESCOM Leiden, The Netherlands; Tanizawa et al., 1986, Chem. Phar, Bull. 34(10):4001-4011; Goldenburg & Creighton, 1983, J. Mol. Biol. 165:407-413; WO 92/00995 and WO 94/15958. These methods may be routinely adapted to synthesize the cyclic compounds of the invention and are incorporated into this application by reference.
- Recombinant Synthesis of the AR02E8 Compounds
- If the AR02E8 compound is composed entirely of genetically-encoded amino acids, or a portion of it is so composed, the peptide or the relevant portion may also be synthesized using conventional recombinant genetic engineering techniques.
- For recombinant production, a polynucleotide sequence encoding the peptide is inserted into an appropriate expression vehicle, i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence, or in the case of an RNA viral vector, the necessary elements for replication and translation. The expression vehicle is then transfected into a suitable target cell which will express the peptide. Depending on the expression system used, the expressed peptide is then isolated by procedures well-established in the art. Methods for recombinant protein and peptide production are well known in the art (see, e.g., Sambrook et al., 1989, Molecular Cloning A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, N.Y.; and Ausubel et al., 1989, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, N.Y. each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.)
- To increase efficiency of production, the polynucleotide can be designed to encode multiple units of the peptide separated by enzymatic cleavage sites—either homopolymers (repeating peptide units) or heteropolymers (different peptides strung together) can be engineered in this way. The resulting polypeptide can be cleaved (e.g., by treatment with the appropriate enzyme) in order to recover the peptide units. This can increase the yield of peptides driven by a single promoter. In a preferred embodiment, a polycistronic polynucleotide can be designed so that a single mRNA is transcribed which encodes multiple peptides (i.e., homopolymers or heteropolymers) each coding region operatively linked to a cap-independent translation control sequence; e.g., an internal ribosome entry site (IRES). When used in appropriate viral expression systems, the translation of each peptide encoded by the mRNA is directed internally in the transcript; e.g., by the IRES. Thus, the polycistronic construct directs the transcription of a single, large polycistronic mRNA which, in turn, directs the translation of multiple, individual peptides. This approach eliminates the production and enzymatic processing of polyproteins and may significantly increase yield of peptide driven by a single promoter.
- Polynucleotides capable of generating or expressing certain cyclic peptide embodiments of the compounds of the invention may be prepared in vitro and/or in vivo. Polypeptides may be prepared from polynucleotides to generate or express the cyclic peptides utilizing the trans splicing ability of split inteins. Methods for making such polynucleotides to yield cyclic peptides are known in the art and are described, for example, in WO 01/66565, WO 00/36093; U.S. Patent Application No. 60/358,827, entitled “Cyclic Peptides and Analogs Useful to Treat Allergies”, filed on 21 Feb. 2002, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the peptides described herein. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA or plasmid DNA expression vectors containing an appropriate coding sequence; yeast or filamentous fungi transformed with recombinant yeast or fungi expression vectors containing an appropriate coding sequence; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing an appropriate coding sequence; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus or tobacco mosaic virus) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing an appropriate coding sequence; or animal cell systems.
- The expression elements of the expression systems vary in their strength and specificities. Depending on the host/vector system utilized, any of a number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, may be used in the expression vector. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as pL of bacteriophage lambda, plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used; when cloning in insect cell systems, promoters such as the baculovirus polyhedron promoter may be used; when cloning in plant cell systems, promoters derived from the genome of plant cells (e.g., heat shock promoters; the promoter for the small subunit of RUBISCO; the promoter for the chlorophyll a/b binding protein) or from plant viruses (e.g., the 35S RNA promoter of CaMV; the coat protein promoter of TMV) may be used; when cloning in mammalian cell systems, promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5 K promoter) may be used; when generating cell lines that contain multiple copies of expression product, SV40-, BPV- and EBV-based vectors may be used with an appropriate selectable marker.
- In cases where plant expression vectors are used, the expression of sequences encoding the peptides of the invention may be driven by any of a number of promoters. For example, viral promoters such as the 35S RNA and 19S RNA promoters of CaMV (Brisson et al., 1984, Nature 310:511-514), or the coat protein promoter of TMV (Takamatsu et al., 1987, EMBO J. 6:307-311) may be used; alternatively, plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO (Coruzzi et al., 1984, EMBO J. 3:1671-1680; Broglie et al., 1984, Science 224:838-843) or heat shock promoters, e.g., soybean hsp17.5-E or hsp17.3-B (Gurley et al., 1986, Mol. Cell. Biol. 6:559-565) may be used. These constructs can be introduced into plant cells using Ti plasmids, Ri plasmids, plant virus vectors, direct DNA transformation, microinjection, electroporation, etc. For reviews of such techniques see, e.g., Weissbach & Weissbach, 1988, Methods for Plant Molecular Biology, Academic Press, N.Y., Section VIII, pp. 421-463; and Grierson & Corey, 1988, Plant Molecular Biology, 2d Ed., Blackie, London, Ch. 7-9.
- In one insect expression system that may be used to produce the peptides of the invention, Autographa californica, nuclear polyhidrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express the foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells. A coding sequence may be cloned into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedron gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example, the polyhedron promoter). Successful insertion of a coding sequence will result in inactivation of the polyhedron gene and production of non-occluded recombinant virus (i.e., virus lacking the proteinaceous coat coded for by the polyhedron gene). These recombinant viruses are then used to infect Spodoptera frugiperda cells in which the inserted gene is expressed (e.g., see Smith et al., 1983, J. Virol. 46:584; U.S. Pat. No. 4,215,051). Further examples of this expression system may be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 2, Ausubel et al., eds., Greene Publish. Assoc. & Wiley Interscience.
- In mammalian host cells, a number of viral based expression systems may be utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, a coding sequence may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region E1 or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing peptide in infected hosts. (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:3655-3659). Alternatively, the vaccinia 7.5 K promoter may be used, (see, e.g., Mackett et al., 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 79:7415-7419; Mackett et al., 1984, J. Virol. 49:857-864; Panicali et al., 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 79:4927-4931).
- Other expression systems for producing AR02E8 peptides of the invention will be apparent to those having skill in the art.
- Purification Of AR02E8 Compounds
- The AR02E8 compounds of the invention can be purified by art-known techniques such as reverse phase chromatography high performance liquid chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, gel electrophoresis, affinity chromatography and the like. The actual conditions used to purify a particular compound will depend, in part, on synthesis strategy and on factors such as net charge, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, etc., and will be apparent to those having skill in the art.
- For affinity chromatography purification, any antibody which specifically binds the compound may be used. For the production of antibodies, various host animals, including but not limited to rabbits, mice, rats, etc., may be immunized by injection with a compound. The compound may be attached to a suitable carrier, such as BSA, by means of a side chain functional group or linkers attached to a side chain functional group. Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, including but not limited to Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacilli Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum.
- Monoclonal antibodies to a compound may be prepared using any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These include, but are not limited to, the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler & Milstein, 1975, Nature 256:495-497 and/or Kaprowski, U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,110; the human B-cell hybridoma technique described by Kosbor et al., 1983, Immunology Today 4:72 and/or Cote et al., 1983, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80:2026-2030; and the EBV-hybridoma technique described by Cole et al., 1985, Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., pp. 77-96. In addition, techniques developed for the production of “chimeric antibodies” (Morrison et al., 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:6851-6855; Neuberger et al., 1984, Nature 312:604-608; Takeda et al., 1985, Nature 314:452-454; Boss, U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,397; Cabilly, U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567) by splicing the genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. Or “humanized” antibodies can be prepared (see, e.g., Queen, U.S. Pat. No. 5,585,089). Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778) can be adapted to produce compound-specific single chain antibodies.
- Antibody fragments which contain deletions of specific binding sites may be generated by known techniques. For example, such fragments include but are not limited to F(ab′)2 fragments, which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule and Fab fragments, which can be generated by reducing the disulfide bridges of the F(ab′)2 fragments. Alternatively, Fab expression libraries may be constructed (Huse et al., 1989, Science 246:1275-1281) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab fragments with the desired specificity for the peptide of interest.
- The antibody or antibody fragment specific for the desired peptide can be attached, for example, to agarose, and the antibody-agarose complex is used in immunochromatography to purify peptides of the invention. See, Scopes, 1984, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice, Springer-Verlag New York, Inc., N.Y., Livingstone, 1974, Methods In Enzymology: Immunoaffinity Chromatography of Proteins 34:723-731.
- As will be recognized by skilled artisans, the above methods may also be used to prepare anti-AK antibodies. Such anti-AK antibodies may be used in the various methods described herein, for example, to inhibit IL-4 induced isotype switching and/or IgE production and/or to inhibit IL-4 induced germline transcription. Such antibodies may also be used in the various therapeutic methods described herein.
- Screening Assays
- The present inventors have discovered that the IgE regulatory effects of three AR02E8 compounds of the invention, peptides AR02E8wt, AR02E8RS and AR02E8VC, are mediated by a adenosine kinase (AK). Specifically, the present inventors have discovered that these three AR02E8 compounds bind a human AK in yeast two hybrid (YTH) assays in a manner that correlates with their ability to inhibit IL-4 induced germline ε transcription in in vitro cellular assays.
- Adenosine, an endogenous modulator of intercellular signaling that reduces cell excitability during stress and trauma, is known to effect myriad biological functions. For example, adenosine inhibits the release of certain neurotransmitters in the CNS (Corradetti et al., 1984, Eur. J. Pharmacol. 104:19-26), stabilizes membrane potential (Rudolphi et al., 1992, Cerebrovasc. Brain Metab. Rev. 4:346-360), exhibits anticonvulsant properties (Dragunow, 1986, Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 7:128-130), exhibits neuroprotectant properties (Rudolphi et al., 1992, Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 13:439-445), modulates transmission of pain in the spinal cord (Sawynok et al., 1986, Br. J. Pharmacol. 88:923-930), modulates the analgesic effect of morphine (Sweeney et al., 1987, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 243:657-665) and exerts a variety of effects on the cardiovascular system, including vasodilation, impairment of atrioventricular conduction and endogenous cardioprotection in myocardial ischemia and reperfusion (Mullane and Williams, 1990, In: Adenosine and Adenosine Receptors, Williams, Ed., Humana Press, New Jersey, pp. 289-334). In the immune system, adenosine inhibits certain neutrophil functions and exhibits anti-inflammatory effects (Cronstein, 1994, J. Appln. Physiol. 76:5-13). Adenosine is believed to effect these physiological functions by interacting with specific extracellular G-protein coupled receptors which regulate membrane cation flux, membrane polarisation and the release of excitatory neurotransmitters.
- Adenosine kinase is a key cytosolic enzyme that regulates intra- and extracellular concentrations of adenosine. In humans, at least two AK isoforms are known, which isoforms are the result of alternate splicing. Isoform a, the short form, has 345 amino acids; isoform b, the long form has 362 amino acids. Isoform a and isoform b differ at only at the amino terminal where the first 4 residues of isoform a are replaced by the first 21 residues of isoform b. The amino acid sequences of human AK isoform a (SEQ ID NO:12) and human AK isoform b (SEQ ID NO:13) are shown in
FIG. 10 . Adenosine kinase phosphorylates adenosine to produce AMP. Adenosine kinase is one of two enzymes responsible for adenosine metabolism. Adenosine deaminase also contributes to adenosine metabolism (by deaminating Ad to produce inosine), but AK appears to predominate in vivo. Inhibition of adenosine kinase potentiates local cellular adenosine levels at cell and tissue sites that are undergoing accelerated adenosine release. Adenosine kinase is also responsible for the activation of many pharmacologically active nucleosides (Miller et al., 1979, J. Biol. Chem. 254:2339-2345), including tubercidin, formycin, ribavirin, pyrazofurin and 6-methylmercaptopurine ribonucleoside. Owing in part to its ability to regulate cellular adenosine levels, inhibitors of adenosine kinase have recently been studied for therapeutic potential (for a review see Kowulak and Jarvis, “Therapeutic Potential of Adenosine Kinase Inhibitors,” Exp. Opin. Invest. Drugs, 2000, 9:551-564; McGaraughty et al, 2001 CNS Drug Reviews 7:415). Inhibitors of adenosine kinase have demonstrated efficacy in animal models of epilepsy, cerebral ischemia, pain and inflammation (Kowulak and Jarvis, 2000, supra). Recently, a specific inhibitor of adenosine kinase, GP515, has been shown to improve experimental colitis in mice (Siegmund et al., 2001, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 296:99-105). Other AK inhibitors are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,646,128 and 5,864,033. However, while adenosine kinase has been recognized as an important therapeutic target for a variety of disorders, the present inventors are the first to discover a link between adenosine kinase and modulation of the IL-4 signaling cascade involved in the production of IgE, and in particular to IL-4 induced isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE. - This significant discovery enables, for the first time, the ability to use an AK as a “surrogate” analyte in simple binding assays to screen for and/or identify compounds involved in IL-4 induced IgE regulation. Such compounds are useful in the treatment and/or prevention of diseases caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, such as anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- Thus, the invention also provides methods and kits useful for identifying compounds having specified utilities. In specific embodiments, the methods and kits may be used to identify compounds that inhibit IL-4 induced IgE production and/or accumulation, compounds that inhibit IL-4 induced isotype switching of B-cells to produce IgE, compounds that inhibit IL-4 induced germline ε transcription, and/or compounds useful to treat or prevent diseases caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, such as those described above.
- “Adenosine kinases” or “AKs” useful in the screening methods and kits of the invention include any protein recognized in the art as belonging to the adenosine kinase family. In particular, useful AKs includes human AK isoform a or isoform b, and allelic and species variants thereof, as well as fragments and fusion proteins thereof, that bind to the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, particularly peptide AR02E8wt. Typically, such proteins will have polypeptide sequences that share at least about 80% identity with one of the known isotypes of AKs, particularly human AK isoform a or isoform b. In addition, AK proteins useful in the screening methods are those that bind the AR02E8 compounds of the invention, in particular, peptide AR02E8 wt. Preferably, the AK protein employed in the methods of the present invention will have at least 85%, 90%, 95% or even higher % identity with one of the known isotypes of AKs, measured as indicated above. Specific examples of AKs suitable for use in the methods and kits of the invention include AKs derived from humans (“hAK”), for example human isoform a (NP—001114/gi:4501943, McNally et al. (1997)), human isoform b (NP-NP—006712/gi:5921990, McNally et al. (1997)), as well as the various corresponding mammalian homologs thereof (for example, rodent, rat, mouse, rabbit, canine, simian, etc.). The amino acid sequences of these various AKs, as well as the sequences of nucleic acid molecules encoding these AKs, are known in the art and can be found in the following references and/or NCBI (GenBank) entries: JC5363/gi:7448825, McNally et al. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 231 (3), 645-650 (1997); AAH03568/gi:13097732, R. Strausberg; NP—001114/gi:4501943, Spychala et al. Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci US 93 (3), 1232-1237 (1996); P55263/gi:6840802, Spychala et al. 1996, supra; NP—006712/gi:5921990; AAH09659/gi:16307144 (mouse); P55262/gi:6840801 (Chinese hamster), Singh et al. Eur. J. Biochem. 241 (2), 564-571 (1996); NP—037027gi:6978451 (rat), McNally et al. 1997, supra.
- As will be recognized by skilled artisans, mutants and/or fragments of an AK may also be used in the assays and kits of the invention. Mutants and/or fragments of AK that are useful in this regard are those mutants and/or fragments that retain the ability to bind an active AR02E8 compound of the invention, preferably peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS or peptide AR02E8VC. Suitable fragments include AKs that are truncated at the N- and/or C-terminus by one or more amino acids, typically by about 1 to 10-20 amino acids, although fragments truncated by more amino acids may be used, provided the fragments bind an active AR02E8 compound. Additionally, mutants and/or fragments of AK that substantially retain one or more of the biological activities of AK are useful in the assays and kits of the invention. By “substantially retain” is meant that the mutant or fragment has at least 10% of the biological activity of AK as measured by any conventional assay of AK activity; preferably, the mutant or fragment has at least 50% of the biological activity of AK.
- AK mutants useful in the methods and kits of the invention include conservative mutants in which one or more amino acids is replaced with another amino acid of the same category, as defined above. Of course AK mutants including non-conservative substitutions may also be used, so long as the particular mutant binds an active AR02E8 compound and/or retains AK activity. Thus, unless indicated otherwise, the expression “adenosine kinase” or “AK” as used herein specifically includes such mutants and/or fragments in addition to the full-length wild-type proteins.
- The AKs may be obtained using conventional recombinant and purification techniques or may be isolated directly from the natural source. For example, any of the recombinant techniques discussed supra in connection with the AR02E8 compounds may be used to produce an AK suitable for use in methods and kits of the invention. Such recombinantly-produced AKs may be isolated using affinity chromatography (for example with an anti-AK antibody or AMP-sepharose) or other conventional techniques. Specific examples that may be routinely adapted are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,294 and Spychala et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (1996) 93:1232), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other techniques for obtaining AKs for use in the methods and kits of the invention will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- Any screening technique known in the art for determining whether compounds bind one another can be used to screen for compounds that bind an AK. The compounds screened can range from small organic molecules to large polymers and biopolymers, and can include, by way of example and not limitation, small organic compounds, saccharides, carbohydrates, polysaccharides, lectins, peptides and analogs thereof, polypeptides, proteins, antibodies, oligonucleotides, polynucleotides, nucleic acids, etc. In one embodiment, the candidate compounds screened are small organic molecules having a molecular weight in the range of about 100-2500 daltons. Such candidate molecules will often comprise cyclical structures composed of carbon atoms or mixtures of carbon atoms and one or more heteroatoms and/or aromatic, polyaromatic, heteroaromatic and/or polyaromatic structures. The candidate agents may include a wide variety of functional group substituents. In one embodiment, the substituent(s) are independently selected from the group of substituents known to interact with proteins, such as, for example, amine, carbonyl, hydroxyl and carboxyl groups.
- The candidate compounds may be screened on a compound-by-compound basis or, alternatively, using one of the myriad library techniques commonly employed in the art. For example, synthetic combinatorial compound libraries, natural products libraries and/or peptide libraries may be screened using the assays of the invention to identify compounds that bind an AK. The candidate compounds may be assessed for the ability to bind an AK per se, or they may be assessed for the ability to competitively bind an AK in the presence of an active AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS, or peptide AR02E8VC, or another compound that competitively binds an AK in the presence of an active AR02E8 compound of the invention. These competitive binding assays can identify compounds that bind the AK at approximately the same site as the active AR02E8 compound. Myriad techniques for carrying out competitive binding assays are known in the art. Any of these techniques may be employed in the present invention.
- Such binding experiments may be conducted wholly in solution or, alternatively, either the AK or the candidate compound may be immobilized on a solid support. For example, the AK or the candidate compound may be attached to a glass or other bead or a solid surface such as, for example, the bottom of a petri dish. The immobilization may be mediated by non-covalent interactions or by covalent interactions. Methods for immobilizing myriad types of compounds and proteins on solid supports are well-known. Any of these methods may be used to immobilize the AK and/or candidate compound on solid supports.
- The binding assays may employ a purified AK or, alternatively, the assays may be carried out with nucleosol and/or cytosol fractions from cells that express the AK, either endogenously or recombinantly. A suitable method for carrying out binding assays with cellular lysates of E. coli cells engineered to express an AK is described in Spychala et al. (1996, supra) and the references cited therein, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Whether carried out in solution or with an immobilized AK or candidate compound, the AK and candidate compound are typically contacted with one another under conditions conducive to binding. Although the actual conditions used can vary, typically the binding assays are carried out under physiological conditions. The concentrations of AK and candidate compound used will depend upon, among other factors, whether the AK or candidate compound is immobilized or free in solution, the binding affinities of candidate compounds, etc. Actual concentrations suitable for a particular assay will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- In many embodiments of the kits and assays of the invention it may be convenient to employ a labeled AK and/or labeled candidate compound. For example, in one convenient embodiment, binding is assessed by contacting an immobilized candidate compound with a labeled AK and assaying for the presence of immobilized label. For such embodiments, the label may be a direct label, i.e., a label that itself is detectable or produces a detectable signal, or it may be an indirect label, i.e., a label that is detectable or produces a detectable signal in the presence of another compound. The method of detection will depend upon the labeled used, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- Examples of suitable direct labels include radiolabels, fluorophores, chromophores, chelating agents, particles, chemiluminescent agents and the like. Suitable radiolabels include, by way of example and not limitation, 3H, 14C, 32P, 35S, 36Cl, 57Co, 58Co, 59Fe, 90Y, 125I, 131I and 186Re. Suitable fluorophores include, by way of example and not limitation, fluorescein, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, Texas red, free or chelated lanthanide series salts such as Eu3+ and the myriad fluorophores available from Molecular Probes Inc., Eugene, Oreg. Examples of suitable colored labels include, by way of example and not limitation, metallic sol particles, for example, gold sol particles such as those described by Leuvering (U.S. Pat. No. 4,313,734); dye sole particles such as described by Gribnau et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,373,932) and May et al. (WO 88/08534); dyed latex such as those described Snyder (
EP 0 280 559 and 0 281 327) and dyes encapsulated in liposomes as described by Campbell et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,703,017). Other direct labels that may be used will be apparent to those of skill in the art. - Examples of suitable indirect labels include enzymes capable of reacting with or interacting with a substrate to produce a detectable signal (such as those used in ELISA and EMIT immunoassays), ligands capable of binding a labeled moiety, and the like. Suitable enzymes useful as indirect labels include, by way of example and not limitation, alkaline phosphatase, horseradish peroxidase, lysozyme, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, lactate dehydrogenase and urease. The use of these enzymes in ELISA and EMIT immunoassays is described in detail in Engvall, 1980, Methods in Enzymology, 70:419-439 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,857,453.
- Methods of labeling proteins and compounds with a variety of labels such as those described above are well-known. Any of these methods may be used to label AKs and/or candidate compounds. For example, an AK may be labeled with a fluorophore such as fluorescein by incubating the AK with, for example, fluorescein isothiocyanate, using conventional techniques. Alternatively, an AK (or a candidate compound produced by recombinant techniques) can be labeled metabolically by culturing cells that express the AK in the presence of culture medium supplemented with a metabolic label, such as, by way of example and not limitation, [35S]-methionine, one or more [14C]-labeled amino acids, one or more [15N]-labeled amino acids and/or [3H]-labeled amino acids (with the tritium substituted at non-labile positions).
- In one embodiment of the invention, candidate compounds may be screened for the ability to bind an AK using an affinity chromatography technique. For example, an AK may be attached to a chromatography resin according to standard techniques to create an AK affinity resin and this AK affinity resin used to identify compounds that bind the resin. Alternatively, the candidate compound could be bound to the resin and the resin used to determine whether it binds an AK. In another alternative embodiment, an active AR02E8 compound of the invention may by attached to the chromatography resin. This AR02E8 affinity resin may then be used to bind an AK and the bound complex used to identify compounds that compete for binding the AK with the active AR02E8 compound, typically by washing the resin with a candidate compound and determining whether the candidate compound disrupts the AK-AR02E8 compound complex by assaying for the release of AK from the resin.
- Although candidate compounds may be screened for the ability to bind an AK on a compound-by-compound basis, it may be more convenient to screen large numbers of candidate compounds simultaneously using one of the many library screening methodologies known in the art. One art-known approach uses recombinant bacteriophage to produce large libraries of peptides which can then be screened in a variety of formats for binding to an AK. Using such phage methods, very large libraries of candidate peptides can be constructed (e.g., 106-108 peptides) and screened for binding with an AK. Methods for constructing and screening such “phage display” libraries are described, for example, in Scott & Smith, 1990, Science 249:386-390; Cwirla et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 87:6378-6382; 1990); Devlin et al., 1990, Science 249:404-406 (1990); U.S. Pat. No. 5,427,908; U.S. Pat. No. 5,432,018; U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,717 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,723,286, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other non-limiting examples of recombinant library methodologies that may be used in connection with the assays of the invention are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,156,571; U.S. Pat. No. 6,107,059 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,733,731, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- A second art-known approach uses chemical methods to synthesize libraries of compounds, such as small organic compounds, peptides and/or peptide analogs, attached to beads or wafers that can then be conveniently screened for binding with an AK. The libraries may be encoded or non-encoded. Methods of synthesizing such immobilized libraries, as well as methods of screening the libraries are described, for example, in Houghten, 1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5735; Geysen et al., 1986, Molecular Immunology 23:709-715; Geysen et al., 1987, J. Immunologic Method 102:259-274; Frank & Döring, 1988, Tetrahedron 44:6031-6040; Fodor et al., 1991, Science 251:767-773; Furka et al., 1988, 4th International Congress of Biochemistry,
Volume 5, Abstract FR:013; Furka, 1991, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 37:487-493; Frank, 1992, Tetrahedron 48:9217-9232; Needels et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:10700-10704; DeWitt et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6909-6913; Frank et al., 1993, Biorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 3:425-430; Ohlmeyer et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:10922-10926; WO 92/00252; WO 9428028; U.S. Pat. No. 6,329,143; U.S. Pat. No. 6,291,183; U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,837; U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,186; U.S. Pat. No. 5,384,261; U.S. Pat. No. 6,165,717; U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,497; U.S. Pat. No. 6,140,493; U.S. Pat. No. 5,789,162; U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,358; U.S. Pat. No. 5,708,153; U.S. Pat. No. 5,639,603; U.S. Pat. No. 5,541,061; U.S. Pat. No. 5,525,735; U.S. Pat. No. 5,525,734; U.S. Pat. No. 6,261,776; U.S. Pat. No. 6,239,273; U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,839; U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,455; U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,157; U.S. Pat. No. 5,609,826; U.S. Pat. No. 6,001,579; U.S. Pat. No. 5,968,736; U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,337; U.S. Pat. No. 5,789,172; U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,099; U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,324; U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,175; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,631,211, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. For reviews of some of these techniques, see Ellman et al., 1996, Account, Chem. Res. 29:132-143; Gallop et al., 1994, J. Med. Chem. 37:1233-1251; Gordon et al., 1994, J. Med. Chem. 37:1385-1401. Non-limiting examples of solid-phase chemical synthesis strategies and conditions useful for synthesizing combinatorial libraries of small organic and other compounds may be found in Bunin, 1998, The Combinatorial Index, Academic Press, London, England (see, e.g., Chapter 1-5) and Hermikens et al., 1996, Tetrahedron 52:4527-4554, as well as the references cited therein, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. - Another art-known approach utilizes solution-phase chemical synthesis techniques to synthesize libraries of compounds, such as, for example, libraries of small organic compounds, which may then be screened in the assays of the invention. Methods for synthesizing and screening such solution-phase libraries are well-known and are described, for example, in Bunin, 1998, The Combinatorial Index, Academic Press, England (see, e.g., Chapter 6); WO 95/02566; U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,736; U.S. Pat. No. 5,766,481; U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,412 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,171, and the references cited therein; the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Additional review articles, references, patents and books describing myriad techniques for synthesizing and screening libraries of compounds for the ability to bind another compound such as an AK can be found at Lebl & Leblova: Dynamic Database of References in Molecular Diversity, Internet http://www.5z.com (see especially the diversity information pages at http://www.5z.com/divinfo).
- Once a candidate compound that binds the AK has been identified, further assays may be carried out to characterize the binding characteristics of the compound, for example, to determine its binding affinity, dissociation constant (Kd), on- and/or off-rates, etc., using well-known techniques. For example, binding affinities can be determined using saturation kinetics and Scatchard analysis. For saturation kinetics, the binding assay can be performed with increasing concentrations of the candidate compound, which is typically labeled with, for example, a radiolabel. Competitive binding experiments with an active AR02E8 or other active compound, for example peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS or peptide AR02E8VC, can be carried out with increasing concentrations of unlabeled candidate compound and a fixed concentration of labeled (for example radiolabeled) active AR02E8 or other compound.
- An alternative method for characterizing receptor/ligand binding characteristics of a plurality of compounds in parallel that may be adapted for use in connection with the invention is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,324,633.
- In one embodiment of the invention, the candidate compounds identified will have a dissociation constant (Kd) for AK on the order of 1 mM, 100 μM, 10 μM, 1 μM, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower. In another embodiment of the invention, the candidate compounds identified will exhibit an IC50 in a competitive binding assay with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention or another compound that competes for binding an AK with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention on the order of 1 mM, 100 μM, 10 μM, 1 μM, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM or even lower. In this context, the IC50 represents the concentration of candidate compound that displaces 50% of the bound AR02E8 or other compound. Suitable assays for measuring such IC50s are well-known.
- If desired, the ability of identified candidate compounds to modulate or regulate IL-4 induced IgE production and/or processes associated therewith can be confirmed in in vitro assays, such as those described herein in connection with the identification of the AR02E8 compounds, for example, as described in the Examples. Other assays that are well known in the art may be used, for example, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,707.
- Knowledge of the interaction surface between a AR02E8 compound of the invention such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS and/or peptide AR02E8VC and an AK, and in particular the AK amino acids involved in binding the AR02E8 compound, can also provide useful information for identifying compounds that bind an AK. Identification and screening of AK binding compounds is further facilitated by determining structural features of an AK-AR02E8 compound complex, e.g., using X-ray crystallography, neutron diffraction, nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometry or any other techniques for structure determination. These techniques provide for the rational design or in silico identification of compounds that bind an AK. The crystal structure of human adenosine kinase has been determined to 1.5 A resolution (Mathews, et al. (1998) Biochem. 37:15607)
- Candidate compounds identified using the screening assays of the invention may be agonists or antagonists of the AK. Thus, the identified compounds may bind to the AK without activating it or may inhibit one or more biological activities of AK (antagonist) or, alternatively, the identified compounds may activate one or more biological activities of the AK (agonists). These functional assays also provide an indirect means of assessing whether a candidate compound binds an AK. Observation of agonist or antagonist activity indicates the candidate compound binds the AK. Thus, the method of the invention may employ functional assays of AK activity to determine whether a candidate compound binds AK. Suitable methods for determining the effect of the candidate compound on the activity of AK are well known and include, for example, methods described in Weisner et al. (J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. (1999) 289:1669) and U.S. Pat. No. 5,864,033.
- Kits
- The invention also provides kits for carrying out the various screening assays and methods of the invention. Such kits will typically include an AK and a compound that competes for binding with the AK, such as an active AR02E8 compound. The AK and/or compound may be labeled or unlabeled. The kit may further include additional components useful for carrying out the assays and methods. Non-limiting examples of such additional components include labels, labeling reagents, binding buffers, etc. The kit may also include instructions teaching its methods of use. In one embodiment, the kit comprises and AK and a compound selected from peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8RS, peptide AR02E8VC, and an analog thereof.
- Uses of the AR02E8 Compounds and Identified Compounds
- As discussed previously, the active AR02E8 compounds of the invention and/or the active AK-binding compounds identified by the above-described screening methods (referred to collectively as “active compounds”), can be used in a variety of in vitro, in vivo and ex vivo applications to regulate or modulate processes involved with the production and/or accumulation of IgE. For example, the active compounds can be used to modulate, and in particular inhibit, any or all of the following processes in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo: IgE production and/or accumulation; the IL-4 receptor-mediated signaling cascade leading to isotype switching and/or production of IgE; IL-4 induced switching of B-cells to produce IgE, IL-4 mediated IgE production; and IL-4 induced germline ε transcription. In a specific embodiment of the invention, the active compounds may be used to treat or prevent diseases characterized by, caused by or associated with production and/or accumulation of IgE. Such treatments may be administered to animals in veterinary contexts or to humans. Diseases that are characterized by, caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, and that can therefore be treated or prevented with the active compounds include, by way of example and not limitation, anaphylactic hypersensitivity or allergic reactions and/or symptoms associated with such reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, systemic mastocytosis, hyper IgE syndrome, IgE gammopathies, atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and/or atopic asthma, and B-cell lymphoma.
- When used to treat or prevent such diseases, the active compounds may be administered singly, as mixtures of one or more active compounds or in mixture or combination with other agents useful for treating such diseases and/or symptoms associated with such diseases. The active compounds may also be administered in mixture or in combination with agents useful to treat other disorders or maladies, such as steroids, membrane stabilizers, 5LO inhibitors, leukotriene synthesis and receptor inhibitors, IgE receptor inhibitors, β-agonists, tryptase inhibitors and antihistamines, to name a few. The active compounds may be administered per se or as pharmaceutical compositions.
- Pharmaceutical compositions comprising the active compounds of the invention may be manufactured by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or lyophilization processes. The compositions may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers, diluents, excipients or auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. The actual pharmaceutical composition administered will depend upon the mode of administration. Virtually any mode of administration may be used, including, for example topical, oral, systemic, inhalation, injection, transdermal, etc.
- The active compound may be formulated in the pharmaceutical compositions per se, or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. As used herein, the expression “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” means those salts which retain substantially the biological effectiveness and properties of the active compound and which is not biologically or otherwise undesirable. Such salts may be prepared from inorganic and organic acids and bases, as is well-known in the art. Typically, such salts are more soluble in aqueous solutions than the corresponding free acids and bases.
- For topical administration, the active compound(s) may be formulated as solutions, gels, ointments, creams, suspensions, etc. as are well-known in the art.
- Systemic formulations include those designed for administration by injection, e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intrathecal or intraperitoneal injection, as well as those designed for transdermal, transmucosal oral or pulmonary administration.
- Useful injectable preparations include sterile suspensions, solutions or emulsions of the active compound(s) in aqueous or oily vehicles. The compositions may also contain formulating agents, such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agent. The formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampules or in multidose containers, and may contain added preservatives.
- Alternatively, the injectable formulation may be provided in powder form for reconstitution with a suitable vehicle, including but not limited to sterile pyrogen free water, buffer, dextrose solution, etc., before use. To this end, the active compound(s) may dried by any art-known technique, such as lyophilization, and reconstituted prior to use.
- For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are known in the art.
- For oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycolate); or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate). The tablets may be coated by methods well known in the art with, for example, sugars or enteric coatings.
- Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, elixirs, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid). The preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate. Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
- For buccal administration, the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
- For rectal and vaginal routes of administration, the active compound(s) may be formulated as solutions (for retention enemas) suppositories or ointments containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
- For administration by inhalation, the active compound(s) can be conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressurized packs or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of e.g. gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
- For prolonged delivery, the active compound(s) can be formulated as a depot preparation, for administration by implantation; e.g., subcutaneous, intradermal, or intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the active ingredient may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (e.g., as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives; e.g., as a sparingly soluble salt.
- Alternatively, transdermal delivery systems manufactured as an adhesive disc or patch which slowly releases the active compound(s) for percutaneous absorption may be used. To this end, permeation enhancers may be used to facilitate transdermal penetration of the active compound(s). Suitable transdermal patches are described in for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,407,713.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,352,456; U.S. Pat. No. 5,332,213; U.S. Pat. No. 5,336,168; U.S. Pat. No. 5,290,561; U.S. Pat. No. 5,254,346; U.S. Pat. No. 5,164,189; U.S. Pat. No. 5,163,899; U.S. Pat. No. 5,088,977; U.S. Pat. No. 5,087,240; U.S. Pat. No. 5,008,110; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,921,475.
- Alternatively, other pharmaceutical delivery systems may be employed. Liposomes and emulsions are well-known examples of delivery vehicles that may be used to deliver active compounds(s). Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) may also be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
- The pharmaceutical compositions may, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which may contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the active compound(s). The pack may, for example, comprise metal or plastic foil, such as a blister pack. The pack or dispenser device may be accompanied by instructions for administration.
- Gene Therapy
- As will be recognized by skilled artisans, active compound(s) that are peptides composed wholly of genetically-encoded amino acids may be administered utilizing well-known gene therapy techniques. According to such techniques, a gene encoding the active compound may be introduced either in vivo, ex vivo, or in vitro in a viral vector. Such vectors include an attenuated or defective DNA virus, such as but not limited to, herpes simplex virus (HSV), papillomavirus, Epstein Barr virus (EBV), adenovirus, adeno-associated virus (AAV), and the like. Defective viruses, which entirely or almost entirely lack viral genes, are preferred.
- Defective virus is not infective after introduction into a cell. Use of defective viral vectors allows for administration to cells in a specific, localized area, without concern that the vector can infect other cells. For example, in the treatment of the various diseases described herein, lymphocyte B-cells can be specifically targeted. Examples of particular vectors include, but are not limited to, a defective herpes virus I (HSV1) vector (Kaplitt et al., 1991, Molec. Cell. Neurosci. 2:320-330), an attenuated adenovirus vector, such as the vector described by Stratford-Perricaudet et al., 1992, J. Clin. Invest. 90:626-630 and a defective adeno-associated virus vector (Samulski et al., 1987, J. Virol. 61:3096-3101; Samulski et al., 1989, J. Virol. 63:3822-3828).
- Preferably, for in vitro administration, an appropriate immunosuppressive treatment is employed in conjunction with the viral vector, e.g., adenovirus vector, to avoid immuno-deactivation of the viral vector and transfected cells. For example, immunosuppressive cytokines, such as interleukin-12 (IL-12), interferon-γ (IFN-γ), or anti-CD4 antibody, can be administered to block humoral or cellular immune responses to the viral vectors (see, e.g., Wilson, 1995, Nat. Med. 1(9):887-889). In addition, it is advantageous to employ a viral vector that is engineered to express a minimal number of antigens.
- In another embodiment the gene can be introduced in a retroviral vector, e.g., as described in Anderson et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,346; Mann et al., 1983, Cell 33:153; Temin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,650,764; Temin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,980,289; Markowitz et al., 1988, J. Virol. 62:1120 (1988); Temin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,124,263; Dougherty et al., WO 95/07358; and Kuo et al., 1993, Blood 82:845. Targeted gene delivery is described in WO 95/28494.
- Alternatively, the vector can be introduced by lipofection. For the past decade, there has been increasing use of liposomes for encapsulation and transfection of nucleic acids in vitro. Synthetic cationic lipids designed to limit the difficulties and dangers encountered with liposome mediated transfection can be used to prepare liposomes for in vivo transfection of a gene encoding a marker (Felgner et. al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:7413-7417; Mackey et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:8027-8031). The use of cationic lipids may promote encapsulation of negatively charged nucleic acids, and also promote fusion with negatively charged cell membranes (Felgner & Ringold, 1989, Science 337:387-388). The use of lipofection to introduce exogenous genes into the specific organs in vivo has certain practical advantages. Molecular targeting of liposomes to specific cells represents one area of benefit. It is clear that directing transfection to particular cell types would be particularly advantageous in a tissue with cellular heterogeneity, such as pancreas, liver, kidney, and the brain. Lipids may be chemically coupled to other molecules for the purpose of targeting (see Mackey et al., 1988, supra). Targeted peptides, e.g., hormones or neurotransmitters, and proteins such as antibodies, or non-peptide molecules could be coupled to liposomes chemically.
- It is also possible to introduce the vector as a naked DNA plasmid. Naked DNA vectors for gene therapy can be introduced into the desired host cells by methods known in the art, e.g., transfection, electroporation, microinjection, transduction, cell fusion, DEAE dextran, calcium phosphate precipitation, use of a gene gun, or use of a DNA vector transporter (see, e.g., Wu et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:963-967; Wu & Wu, 1988, J. Biol. Chem., 263:14621-14624; Canadian Patent Application No. 2,012,311).
- Naked nucleic acids encoding the active compound may also be introduced using the gene-activated matrices described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,427.
- Effective Dosages
- The active compound(s) of the invention, or compositions thereof, will generally be used in an amount effective to treat or prevent the particular disease being treated. The compound(s) may be administered therapeutically to achieve therapeutic benefit or prophylactically to achieve prophylactic benefit. By therapeutic benefit is meant eradication or amelioration of the underlying disorder being treated, e.g., eradication or amelioration of the underlying allergy, atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema or atopic asthma, and/or eradication or amelioration of one or more of the symptoms associated with the underlying disorder such that the patient reports an improvement in feeling or condition, notwithstanding that the patient may still be afflicted with the underlying disorder. For example, administration of an active compound to a patient suffering from an allergy provides therapeutic benefit not only when the underlying allergic response is eradicated or ameliorated, but also when the patient reports a decrease in the severity or duration of the symptoms associated with the allergy following exposure to the allergen. Therapeutic benefit also includes halting or slowing the progression of the disease, regardless of whether improvement is realized.
- For prophylactic administration, the active compound may be administered to a patient at risk of developing a disorder characterized by, caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation, such as the various disorders previously described. For example, if it is unknown whether a patient is allergic to a particular drug, the active compound may be administered prior to administration of the drug to avoid or ameliorate an allergic response to the drug. Alternatively, prophylactic administration may be applied to avoid the onset of symptoms in a patient diagnosed with the underlying disorder. For example, an active compound may be administered to an allergy sufferer prior to expected exposure to the allergen. Active compounds may also be administered prophylactically to healthy individuals who are repeatedly exposed to agents known to induce an IgE-related malady to prevent the onset of the disorder. For example, an active compound may be administered to a healthy individual who is repeatedly exposed to an allergen known to induce allergies, such as latex allergy, in an effort to prevent the individual from developing an allergy.
- The amount of active compound(s) administered will depend upon a variety of factors, including, for example, the particular indication being treated, the mode of administration, whether the desired benefit is prophylactic or therapeutic, the severity of the indication being treated and the age and weight of the patient, the bioavailability of the particular active compound, etc. Determination of an effective dosage is well within the capabilities of those skilled in the art.
- Initial dosages may be estimated initially from in vitro assays. For example, an initial dosage for use in animals may be formulated to achieve a circulating blood or serum concentration of active compound that inhibits about 25% or more of IL-4 induced IgE production, or a process associated therewith, such as germline ε transcription, as measured in an in vitro assay. Alternatively, an initial dosage for use in animals may be formulated to achieve a circulating blood or serum concentration of active compound that is equal to or greater than the IC50 as measured in an AK competitive binding assay with an active AR02E8 compound of the invention, such as peptide AR02E8wt, peptide AR02E8VC or peptide AR02E8RS. Calculating dosages to achieve such circulating blood or serum concentrations taking into account the bioavailability of the particular active compound is well within the capabilities of skilled artisans. For guidance, the reader is referred to Fingl & Woodbury, “General Principles,” In: The Pharmaceutical Basis of Therapeutics,
Chapter 1, pp. 1-46, 1975, and the references cited therein. - Initial dosages can also be estimated from in vivo data, such as animal models. Animals models useful for testing the efficacy of compounds to treat or prevent diseases characterized by, caused by or associated with IgE production and/or accumulation are well-known in the art. Suitable animal models of hypersensitivity or allergic reactions are described in Foster, 1995, Allergy 50(21Suppl):6-9, discussion 34-38 and Tumas et al., 2001, J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 107(6):1025-1033. Suitable animal models of allergic rhinitis are described in Szelenyi et al., 2000, Arzneimittelforschung 50(11):1037-42; Kawaguchi et al., 1994, Clin. Exp. Allergy 24(3):238-244 and Sugimoto et al., 2000, Immunopharmacology 48(1):1-7. Suitable animal models of allergic conjunctivitis are described in Carreras et al., 1993, Br. J. Opthalmol. 77(8):509-514; Saiga et al., 1992, Ophthalmic Res. 24(1):45-50; and Kunert et al., 2001, Invest. Opthalmol. Vis. Sci. 42(11):2483-2489. Suitable animal modules of systemic mastocytosis are described in O'Keefe et al., 1987, J. Vet. Intern. Med. 1(2):75-80 and Bean-Knudsen et al., 1989, Vet. Pathol. 26(1):90-92. Suitable animal models of hyper IgE syndrome are described in Claman et al, 1990, Clin. Immunol. Immunopathol. 56(1):46-53. Suitable animal models of B-cell lymphoma are described in Hough et al., 1998, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 95:13853-13858 and Hakim et al., 1996, J. Immunol. 157(12):5503-5511. Suitable animal models of atopic disorders such as atopic dermatitis, atopic eczema and atopic asthma are described in Chan et al., 2001, J. Invest. Dermatol. 117(4):977-983 and Suto et al., 1999, Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 120(Suppl 1):70-75. Ordinarily skilled artisans can routinely adapt such information to determine dosages suitable for human administration.
- Dosage amounts will typically be in the range of from about 1 mg/kg/day to about 100 mg/kg/day, 200 mg/kg/day, 300 mg/kg/day, 400 mg/kg/day or 500 mg/kg/day, but may be higher or lower, depending upon, among other factors, the activity of the active compound, its bioavailability, the mode of administration and various factors discussed above. Dosage amount and interval may be adjusted individually to provide plasma levels of the active compound(s) which are sufficient to maintain therapeutic or prophylactic effect. In cases of local administration or selective uptake, such as local topical administration, the effective local concentration of active compound(s) may not be related to plasma concentration. Skilled artisans will be able to optimize effective local dosages without undue experimentation.
- The compound(s) may be administered once per day, a few or several times per day, or even multiple times per day, depending upon, among other things, the indication being treated and the judgement of the prescribing physician.
- Preferably, the active compound(s) will provide therapeutic or prophylactic benefit without causing substantial toxicity. Toxicity of the active compound(s) may be determined using standard pharmaceutical procedures. The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic (or prophylactic) effect is the therapeutic index. Active compound(s) that exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred.
- The invention having been described, the following examples are offered by way of illustration and not limitation.
- Peptide AR02E8wt was identified by screening a retroviral library of random peptide 20-mers for the ability to inhibit IL-4 induced germline ε transcription using the HBEGF2a/diphtheria dual reporter phenotypic screening system described in WO 01/31232. To construct the random library, A5T4 reporter cells (described in more detail below) were infected with an infectious retroviral library of random peptide 20-mers (prepared as described in WO 97/27213; see also WO 01/34806 at page 39, line 36 through page 40, line 19). The retroviral vector used includes a gene encoding blue fluorescent protein (BFP) fused upstream of the region encoding the random peptide via a linker region encoding an α-helical peptide linker (expression fusion product is referred to as “BFP-peptide”). Expression of the BFP-peptide product is controlled by a promoter sensitive to the tetracycline-regulated transactivator such that expression of the BFP-peptide is regulated by tetracycline (Tet) or doxycycline (Dox). See U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/096,339, entitled “Methods and Compositions for Screening for Altered Cellular Phenotypes,” filed on Mar. 8, 2002. The BFP reporter gene provides a rapid phenotypic assay to determine whether cells were infected: infected cells express BFP-peptide and fluoresce blue (phenotype BFP+), uninfected cells do not express BFP-peptide, and do not fluoresce blue (phenotype BFP−). To reduce the number of stop codons, the region of the vector encoding the random peptide was of the sequence (NNK)20, where each N independently represents A, T, C or G and K represents T or G. The library was also biased to account for degeneracy in the genetic code.
- The A5T4 reporter cell line was engineered from BJAB B-cells (Menezes et al., 1975, Biomedicine 22:276-284; Source: Yoshinobu Matsuo, PhD., Fujisaki Cell Center, Hayashibara Biochemical Labs, Inc., 675-1 Fujisaki, Okayama 702-8006, Japan) and includes a reporter gene encoding the HBEGF2a/GFP dual function reporter positioned downstream of an engineered 600 base pair IL-4 responsive fragment of an ε promoter (
FIG. 1 ; see also WO 99/58663) such that ultimate expression of the dual function reporter is driven by the ε promoter. When expressed, the dual function reporter cleaves into two pieces, a heparin-binding epidermal growth factor-like growth factor (HBEGF) and a green fluorescent protein (GFP), via the self-cleaving 2a sequence (Donnelly et al., 2001, J. Gen. Viol. 82:1027-1041; Donnelly et al., 1997, J. Gen. Virol. 78:13-21; Mattion et al., 1996, J. Virol. 70:8124; Ryan et al., 1994, EMBO J. 13:928-33 Ryan et al., 1991, J. Gen. Virol. 72:2727; Hellen et al., 1989, Biochem. 28:9881; see also, WO 99/58663). In this reporter system, cells ectopically expressing HBEGF are capable of translocating diphtheria toxin (DT) into their cytoplasm, leading to rapid, acute cytotoxicity. Cells that do not express HBEGF are spared this fate and continue to survive even in the presence of high concentrations of DT. The A5T4 reporter cell line was further engineered to express the tetracycline-regulated transactivator (tTA), allowing for regulation of peptide library expression with tetracycline (Tet) or doxycycline (Dox). See U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/096,339, entitled “Methods and Compositions for Screening for Altered Cellular Phenotypes,” filed on Mar. 8, 2002, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Thus, according to this dual phenotypic reporter system, unstimulated control cells expressing a random peptide fluoresce blue (BFP+) in the absence of tetracycline or doxycycline. In the presence of Tet or Dox peptide is not made and the cells are BFP−. Following stimulation with IL-4, BFP+ cells expressing a non-inhibitory peptide fluoresce green and, in addition, are sensitive to DT. Stimulated BFP+ cells expressing an inhibitory peptide do not fluoresce green and are not DT sensitive. The toxin-conditional selection and Tet or Dox-controlled peptide expression features of the A5T4 screening line are illustrated inFIGS. 2A & 2B , respectively. - Following infection, the library was enriched for cells expressing peptides that inhibit IL-4 induced transcription as generally outlined in the top half of
FIG. 3 and sorted by FACS into single cell clones. The clones were then screened as generally illustrated in the lower half ofFIG. 3 . Briefly, for screening, each clone was divided into two populations and one population was treated with Dox (10 ng/ml). After 5 days, both populations were stimulated with IL-4 (final conc. 60 U/mL; PeptroTech, Inc.) and, after 3 more days, both populations were analyzed by FACS to measure BFP and GFP fluorescence. FACS data were converted to a “reporter ratio”, which is defined for this purpose as the ratio of the geometric mean of GFP fluorescence of the +IL-4/+Dox to the +IL-4/−Dox populations. Cells expressing a peptide that inhibits germline ε transcription have a reporter ratio of >1.1. A reporter ratio of >1.2 is indicative of strong inhibition. - The sequences of peptides expressed by positive clones (reporter ratios of >1.1) were obtained by RT-PCR amplification of the integrated peptide-expressing sequences. In this experiment, of 2.4×109 A5T4 cells infected, 218 positive clones were identified, 199 of which were unique. From this same experiment, 155 total clones with a reporter ratio of >1.19 were identified, 136 of which were unique. Clone AR02E8, which encodes peptide AR02E8wt, was amongst the positive clones identified (clone AR02E8 had a reporter ratio of 1.77.
- Clone AR02E8 Transfers its Phenotype Into Naïve Cells
- The ability of peptide AR02E8wt to inhibit germline ε transcription was confirmed in naïve cells. Briefly, Phoenix cells were transfected with a retroviral vector encoding a BFP-AR02E8wt peptide fusion as described in WO 99/58663 and WO 97/27213. Naïve A5T4 cells were infected with the resultant virions and grown for 3 days. The infected cells were stimulated with IL-4 (60 U/mL) and, after 3 days, the cells were assessed by FACS for BFP and GFP. The FACS data are presented in
FIG. 4 . As illustrated inFIG. 4 , there are two populations of cells: infected cells that express the BFP-peptide fusion (BFP+) and uninfected cells that do not (BFP−). The BFP fluorescence data corresponding to the BFP+ and BFP− populations are provided in Panel A. The GFP fluorescence data corresponding to the BFP+ and BFP− populations are presented in Panel B. The reporter ratio for this purpose is determined as the geometric mean of the GFP fluorescence of the BFP− population divided by the geometric mean of the GFP fluorescence of the BFP+ population. The reporter ratio for the AR02E8 in this re-infection assay was 2.93. - Peptide AR02E8wt Inhibits Transcription of an Endogenous Germline ε Promoter
- The ability of peptide AR02E8wt to inhibit transcription of an endogenous germline ε promoter was confirmed using a TAQMAN® assay (Roche Molecular, Alameda, Calif.). Briefly, A5T4 cells were infected with retrovirus capable of expressing peptide AR02E8wt (prepared as described above). The cells were sorted for BFP+ to select for infected cells. Infected cells were divided into two populations. One population was exposed to Dox (10 ng/ml). Both populations were stimulated with IL-4 (60 U/ml). After 3 days, the cells were pelleted and the pellets assayed for ε promoter transcription using a TAQMAN assay performed as described in Applied Biosystems Protocol 4310299 (available at http:\\www.appliedbiosystems.com). The primers and probe, which are specific for the transcription product driven by the A5T4 endogenous ε promoter, were as follows (the probe was labeled at the 5′-end with Fam and at the 3′-end with Tamra):
ε forward primer: ATCCACAGGCACCAAATGGA (SEQ ID NO:5) ε reverse primer: GGAAGACGGATGGGCTCTG (SEQ ID NO:6) ε probe: ACCCGGCGCTTCAGCCTCCA (SEQ ID NO:7) - The measured endogenous ε inhibition ratio, defined as the ratio of the relative expression units (TAQMAN quantitative PCR of ε transcription product) of +IL-4/+Dox to +IL-4/−Dox cells, was 15.29 (average of 3 values; p=0.0004), indicating that peptide AR02E8wt strongly inhibits the endogenous germline ε promoter.
- Peptide AR02E8wt is Selective for the Germline ε Promoter
- To demonstrate selectivity for the germline ε promoter, peptide AR02E8wt was tested for inhibition of germline α transcription. The assay was similar to that described in the immediately preceding section, except that ST486 cells (ATCC # CRL-1647) engineered to express the tetracycline-regulated transactivator were infected and the infected cells were stimulated with TGF-β (40 ng/ml; Peprotech). The primers and probe, which are specific for the transcription product driven by the ST486 endogenous α promoter, were as follows (the probe was labeled at the 5′-end with Fam and at the 3′-end with Tamra):
α forward primer: CAGCACTGCGGGCCC (SEQ ID NO:8) α reverse primer: TCAGCGGGAAGACCTTGG (SEQ ID NO:9) α probe: CCAGCAGCCTGACCAGCATCCC (SEQ ID NO:10) - The measured endogenous α inhibition ratio was 0.79 (average of 3 values; p=0.1120), indicating that peptide AR02E8wt does not inhibit transcription of the germline α promoter. These data confirm that peptide AR02E8wt is a selective inhibitor of germline ε transcription.
- IgE Synthesis and ELISA Assay
- This example describes an IgE synthesis mixed lymphocyte and ELISA assay that may be used to assess the amount of IgE produced by cells such as human peripheral blood lymphocytes or other lymphatic cells in the presence and absence of candidate compounds, such as AR02E8 compounds and/or compounds identified in the screening assays of the invention.
- IgE Synthesis Assay
-
- (a) Materials
- In the various protocols that follow below, the following materials are used:
- Heparin (Sigma H3393, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Histopaque 1077 tubes (Sigma A0561, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Iscove's Modified Dulbeccos Medium (“IMDM); Sigma I3390, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Bovine Serum Albumin (“BSA”; Sigma A9418, St. Louis, Mo.).
- Fetal Bovine Serum (“FCS”; Sigma F7524, St. Louis, Mo.). (the serum is heat inactivated prior to use at 56° C. for 30 minutes, aliquoted and stored at −20° C.; “HI-FCS”)
- Human Transferrin (Sigma T2252, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Bovine Insulin (Sigma I1882, St. Louis, Mo.)
- 200 mM L-Glutamine (“L-Gln”; Sigma G7513, St. Louis, Mo.) (stored as 5 ml aliquots at −20° C.)
- Pen/
Strep 10% solution (Sigma P0781, St. Louis, Mo.) (stored as 5 ml aliquots at −20° C.) - PBS Dulbeccos (Gibco BRL 14190-094, now Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.)
- DMSO (Sigma D2650, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Recombinant Human IL-4 (R&D Systems 204-1L, Minneapolis, Minn.) (stored as a stock solution of 100,000 U/ml in culture medium at −20° C.)
- 96 well tissue culture plates (Costar 3595, Corning Inc., Life Sciences, Acton Mass.)
- 96 well dilution blocks (Porvair 219008, Shepperton, UK)
- Culture Medium: supplement 500 ml IMDM with 0.5% BSA (2.5 g), 10% HI-FCS (50 ml), 25 mg human transferrin, 2.5 mg bovine insulin, 2 mM L-Gln (5 ml) and 1% pen/strep (5 mL). Filter sterilize before use.
-
- (b) Blood Collection
- Make up a 1 mg/ml solution of heparin in sterile PBS and
place 1 ml in each sterile 50 ml centrifuge tube required. Collect 50 ml of venous blood from a healthy human volunteer per centrifuge tube. -
- (c) Lymphocyte Isolation
- Lymphocytes are isolated from the blood according to the protocol below:
-
- 1. Dilute blood with an equal volume of PBS containing 2% HI-FCS.
- 2. Add 20 ml diluted blood to each histopaque tube. The histopaque tubes should be warmed to room temperature before use. They can be left overnight at room temp in the dark and then spun at 1000 rpm for 5 min to settle the contents before use. Spin at 1000 g for 35 min at room temperature in a benchtop centrifuge with the break set to off.
- 3. Draw off the upper plasma layer and discard.
- 4. Draw off the lymphocyte layer into a sterile centrifuge tube. If there is clear definition between the bottom of the lymphocyte layer and the top of the frit, remove only the lymphocyte layer, not all the liquid above the frit.
- 5. Add 30 ml PBS-2% HI-FCS to each 10 ml of cell suspension and spin at 1000 rpm for 10 min at room temp.
- 6. Discard the supernatant and resuspend each cell pellet in 5-10 ml PBS-2% HI-FCS. Transfer the suspensions to a single tube and bring the volume to 40 ml with PBS-2% HI-FCS. Spin at 1000 rpm for 10 min at room temp.
- 7. Repeat Step 6.
- 8. Wash the cells once with 40 ml culture medium.
- 9. Discard the supernatant and resuspend the pellet in 10 ml or less culture medium.
- 10. Count the cells (using a Neubauer haemocytometer, a Coulter Max-M cell counter or other counter).
- 11. Resuspend the cells in culture medium to a concentration of 2×106 cells/ml. The cells can be left at this stage until they are needed for assay set up.
- (d) Assay Set Up
- The assay is carried out as follows:
- 1. Dissolve test compounds in DMSO to give a 10 mM stock solution. If necessary, sonicate the stock solution to aid dissolution of the compound.
- 2. Dilute each compound stock solution 1:20 with culture medium to yield a 500 μM solution in 5% DMSO. Serially dilute this 500 μM stock solution 1:10 with culture medium several times to provide enough stock solutions to test the compounds over a range of concentrations (e.g., from 1 nM to 10 μM).
- 3. Just prior to use, prepare a stock solution of IL-4 (1000 U/ml in culture medium).
- 4. To test the compounds and prepare appropriate controls, add to the appropriate wells of a multiwell plate the following reagents in the following amounts:
Reagent +IL-4 control −IL-4 control Sample Test Compound — — 50 μl IL-4 50 μl — 50 μl Culture Medium — 50 μl — 0.5% DMSO in 50 μl 50 μl — Culture Medium Cells 150 μl 150 μl 150 μl Total Volume 250 μl 250 μl 250 μl - 5. Incubate the plates for 10-12 days at 37° C. in a CO2 incubator (5% CO2/95% O2). Following incubation, spin the plates at 1000 rpm for 10 min and store at −20° C. until ready for the ELISA detection assay that follows below.
- ELISA Assay for Detection of IgE
-
- (a) Materials
- In the assay protocol that follows below, the following materials are used:
- Nunc maxisorp ELISA plates (GIBCO Brl, now Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.)
- Murine anti human IgE (GEI clone) (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Phosphate buffered saline (“PBS”; Sigma. St. Louis, Mo.)
- Bovine serum albumin (“BSA”; Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Polyethylenesorbitan monolaurate (“
TWEEN 20”; Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.) - OPD tablets (DAKO Corp., Carpenteria, Calif.)
- Streptavidin biotinylated horseradish peroxidase complex (“Streptavidin HRP”; Amersham, Piscataway, N.J.)
- Human Myeloma protein IgE (The Binding Site, Inc.; San Diego, Calif.)
- Biotinylated anti human IgE (Vector Laboratories, Inc., Burlingame, Calif.)
- Hydrogen peroxide (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.)
- Distilled water (“dH2O”)
- Buffer A: 0.1 M NaHCO3, pH 9.6
- Buffer B: 0.1
% TWEEN 20 in PBS - Buffer C: 1% BSA in Buffer B
- Stop Solution: 0.6M H2SO4
-
- (a) Protocol
- The assay which measures the amount of IgE synthesized by the various controls and samples prepared above, is carried out as described in the following protocol:
- 1) Coat Nunc maxisorp plates with 50 μl of murine anti human IgE (1:2000 in Buffer A). Leave plates at 4° C. overnight. Plates can be stored in this way for a maximum of 7 days.
- 2)
Wash plates 3× with Buffer. - 3) Block any unbound sites on the plate by adding 200 μl of buffer C. Incubate the plates for at least 2 hours at room temperature. If blocking overnight incubate at 4 C. Blocked plates should only be kept for a maximum of 2 days.
- 4)
Wash plates 3× with Buffer B. - 5)
Place 50 μl of the sample or standard IgE diluted in Buffer C to each well. IgE standards are diluted to give a concentration range of 100 ng/ml-0 ng/ml. To make up the 100 ng/ml standard, carry out the following dilutions of stock IgE (0.5 mg/ml) in buffer C: 1 in 50 to give a 10 μg/ml solution (a minimum of 10 μls must be transferred from the stock) followed by a 1 in 10 to give 1 g/ml and then a further 1 in 10 to give 100 ng/ml. Double dilutions are then carried out in buffer C to give the rest of the standard curve. Carry out all dilutions in glass bottles (10 oz) and make up at least 1 ml of each so that reasonable volumes are being transferred (one ELISA plate requires 100 μls of each standard). For the pilot ELISA the standard curve is added to each plate just after the samples have been added. Set up one ELISA plate with 3-4 columns of standards only. This will be used to determine development time atprotocol Step 11.- For the pilot ELISA incubate the plates for one-two hours at room temperature
- For the full ELISA incubate the plates overnight at 4° C.
- 6)
Wash plates 3× with Buffer B. - 7) Add 50 μl of biotinylated anti human IgE (1/500 dilution in Buffer B) to all wells. Incubate the plate for 1 hour at room temperature.
- 8)
Wash plates 3× with Buffer B - 9) Add 50 μl of streptavidin HRP to each well (1/800 dilution in Buffer B). Incubate the plates for 45 mins to 1 hour at room temperature. The plates must not be left for longer than 1 hour at this stage.
- 10)
Wash plates 3× with Buffer B. - 11) Add 50 μl of substrate (4 OPD tablets per 12 ml dH2O plus 5 μl hydrogen peroxide per 12 ml) to each well and wait for the color to develop (this usually occurs within 10 minutes). Determine the time taken to give the required OD (1.5-2 for 100 ng/ml of standard IgE) using a plate containing only a standard curve. Develop all test plates for this amount of time and in batches of 5 plates. This is especially important if there are a large number of plates.
- 12) Quench the reaction by adding 50 μl Stop Solution.
- 13) Read plates at 492 nm within 30 minutes of stopping the reaction.
Peptide AR02E8wt Mediates its Inhibitory Action by Binding Adenosine Kinase - Identification of Potential Binding Partners for Peptide AR02E8wt
- Potential binding partners for peptide AR02E8wt were identified in a β-galactosidase yeast two-hybrid (YTH) assay using peptide AR02E8wt as bait and a cDNA library constructed from the A5T4 reporter cell line as prey. Binding was assessed by β-galactosidase quantification using BetaFluor (Novagen) as a substrate. A negative interaction control (no cDNA fused downstream of the GAL4 activation domain sequence) was also run. A general outline of the YTH assay is illustrated in
FIG. 5A . Following clustering, filtering to remove non-specific bait hits (e.g., GFP and BFP), singletons and clusters recognized by 10 or more cDNA baits (based upon historical YTH assays), and prioritization, 45 prey clones were identified as hits. - Potential targets identified in the YTH assay were reconfirmed as generally outlined in
FIG. 6 . The cDNA clones identified as hits in the YTH assay were purified and rescreened for interaction with the AR02E8wt peptide in a YTH assay. The hit clones were also screened in a control assay for interaction with the BFP using a vector (pGBKT7) that contained only the BFP and not the AR02E8 peptide. At this stage, 27 putative target clones remained. - In order to further discriminate among the putative targets, functional/interaction profile analyses were carried out as described in copending application Ser. No. 10/095,659, entitled Methods of Identifying Protein Targets, filed Mar. 8, 2002, attorney docket RIGL-003/00US.
- Confirmation that Peptide AR02E8wt Mediates its Inhibitory Action by Binding Adenosine Kinase
- Identification of colony AR02E8 clone NS358 as the binding partner for peptide AR02E8wt was confirmed using the profiling method described in copending application Ser. No. 10/095,659, entitled Methods of Identifying Protein Targets, filed Mar. 8, 2002 (identified by attorney docket no. RIGL-003/00US), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The functional profile was obtained using the A5T4 reporter cell line and the interaction profiles were obtained using the YTH assay and compared for correspondence. The main concept underlying this profiling method is that mutants will tend to act the same way in both the functional assay and an interaction assay with the target polypeptide of the wild-type peptide. That is, a mutant that exhibits an increase in function (as compared to the wild-type peptide) in the functional assay will exhibit an increase in interaction (as compared to the wild-type peptide) in a YTH assay with the target polypeptide of the wild-type peptide. Stated another way, the target polypeptide will yield an interaction profile that corresponds closely to the functional profile when compared visually or by other means.
- A collection of AR02E8 mutants was generated by replacing single or double amino acid residues in the sequence of AR02E8wt with a different amino acid, typically an alanine or glycine, as described in copending application Ser. No. 10/095,659, entitled Methods of Identifying Protein Targets, filed Mar. 8, 2002 attorney docket RIGL-003/00US. The functional profiles for the mutants derived from AR02E8wt was obtained by constructing and screening for activity in the A5T4 reporter cell line in the manner described above. The activity of each mutant at the germline promoter is reflected in the reporter ratio as described above. The reporter ratios were the functional values that were used to develop the functional profiles.
- TABLE 2 depicts the amino acid sequences (the dual alanine/glycine mutations are underlined) of the mutants tested and the measured reporter ratios when screening in the A5T4 reporter line.
TABLE 2 Re- Peptide porter Name Peptide Sequence Ratio SEQ ID NO AR02E8wt DTMQVQCGVCRSGYVVAFWDVGP 2.93 (SEQ ID NO: 1) AR02E8VC DTMQVQCGAGRSGYVVAFWDVGP 1.13 (SEQ ID NO: 2) AR02E8RS DTMQVQCGVCAGGYVVAFWDVGP 1.46 (SEQ ID NO: 3) AR02E8YV DTMQVQCGVCRSGAGVAFWDVGP 1.07 (SEQ ID NO: 4) - The interaction of AR02E8wt peptide and its mutants with the clones identified as potential targets for the peptide AR02E8wt was then quantified in a β-galactosidase YTH assay. The YTH assay was performed in the manner described above. A general outline of this YTH assay is illustrated in
FIG. 5B . For each clone tested, an interaction profile was developed by comparing the β-galactosidase activity of each mutant to that of the wild type peptide as described above. - Comparison of the interaction and functional profiles was performed by categorizing the mutants of AR02E8 based on the functional and interaction assays. Based on the reporter ratio, each mutant was categorized into one of four functional categories: (1) reduction of function (ROF); (2) loss of function (LOF); (3) increase of function (IOF) or (4) functionally neutral (N) as compared to the activity of the wild type peptide, here AR02E8wt. As mentioned previously, cells expressing a peptide that inhibits germline ε transcription have reporter ratios of ≧1.1. Cells expressing a loss of function (LOF) mutant have a reporter ratio of <1.11. An increase of function mutant (IOF) shows a>50% increase in reporter ratio and a reduction of function (ROF) of mutant shows a>50% decrease in reporter ratio. Functionally neutral mutants have reporter ratios that fall within ±50% of that of the AR02E8wt peptide. The % increase or decrease in reporter ratio is calculated after subtracting 1.0 from the individual ratios. Using these criteria, peptide AR02E8VC (SEQ ID NO:2) and peptide ARO2E8RS (SEQ ID NO:3) were designated as ROF mutants, and peptide AR02E8YV (SEQ ID NO:4) was designated as a LOF mutant. No IOF mutant were found for the AR02E8 clone.
- The interaction of these IOF, ROF and LOF mutants with different polypeptides encoded by the putative target clones were quantified using the YTH assay described above. Based on the YTH assay, for each putative target, the mutants were categorized into the following four interaction categories: (1) reduction of interaction (ROI); (2) loss of interaction (LOI); (3) increase of interaction (IOI); and (4) interactionally neutral (N), by assessing the binding affinity ratio of the mutant peptide and the wild type peptide (β-gal activity of mutant/wild type) to the putative target. The selection criteria for categorizing the interactions is shown on
FIG. 8 . - Based on these functional and interaction categorizations, graphic profile representations for each potential target polypeptide were obtained using a weighted categorization process as depicted in
FIG. 9 . InFIG. 9 , the functional profile (reporter ratios of AR02E8wt and its three mutants) is plotted along the X-axis and the interaction profile (β-galactosidase signal from the YTH assay for AR02E8wt and its three mutants) is plotted along the Y-axis of each of 5 putative target clones—4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_U—358, 4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_U—351-2, 4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_S—162, 4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_U—0350, and 4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_U—280. The X-axis is further categorized into L (loss of function), R (reduction of function), N (functionally neutral), and I (increase of function) based on the reporter ratios, as described above. Similarly, the Y-axis is further categorized based on the criteria inFIG. 8 . In such a graphic profile, profiles that correspond closely have interaction values (in this case, β-galactosidase signal) and functional values (in this case, reporter ratios) that fall along a line with a positive slope. Also, close correspondence is indicated when the mutants fall within the same category type using both the reporter ratio and the β-galactosidase signal, i.e., a mutant categorized as a L based on the reporter ratio is also categorized as a L based on the β-galactosidase signal. In this case, the interaction and functional profiles for 4.2AR02E8 clone NS 358 (4.2 AR02E8_Y_GB_U—358) fall along a line with a positive slope. Each of the three mutants also fall within the same respective categories based on both reporter ratio and β-galactosidase signal. The profiles for the other putative target clones selected in the initial YTH screen do not satisfy these criteria. - Based on the close correspondence observed between the interaction and functional profiles, the polypeptide encoded by 4.2AR02E8 clone NS 358, was identified as a target for peptide AR02E8wt. The clone was sequenced and a sequence comparison (using a Blast search with default parameters) with sequences in the NCBI (GenBank) nucleic acid sequence database was carried out. From this sequence comparison, clone 4.2AR02E8 clone NS 358 was determined to be human adenosine kinase, NCBI accession # NM—001123 (short isoform), NM—006721 (long isoform); protein accession # NP—001114 and NP—006712.
- While the invention has been described by reference to various specific embodiments, skilled artisans will recognize that numerous modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit and the scope of the appended claims.
- All references cited throughout the disclosure are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties for all purposes.
Claims (2)
1. A method of identifying a compound that modulates IL4 receptor-mediated IgE production or a process associated therewith, comprising determining whether the compound binds An adenosine kinase, wherein the ability to bind the adenosine kinase identifies the compound as being a modulator of IL-4 induced IgE production or a process associated therewith.
2-52. (canceled)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/608,788 US20080003620A1 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2006-12-08 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/197,381 US7141434B2 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2002-07-16 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
US11/608,788 US20080003620A1 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2006-12-08 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/197,381 Continuation US7141434B2 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2002-07-16 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20080003620A1 true US20080003620A1 (en) | 2008-01-03 |
Family
ID=30115134
Family Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/197,381 Expired - Lifetime US7141434B2 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2002-07-16 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
US11/550,731 Abandoned US20070054862A1 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2006-10-18 | Methods of Identifying Compounds that Modulate IL-4 Receptor-Mediated IgE Synthesis Utilizing an Adenosine Kinase |
US11/608,788 Abandoned US20080003620A1 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2006-12-08 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/197,381 Expired - Lifetime US7141434B2 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2002-07-16 | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase |
US11/550,731 Abandoned US20070054862A1 (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2006-10-18 | Methods of Identifying Compounds that Modulate IL-4 Receptor-Mediated IgE Synthesis Utilizing an Adenosine Kinase |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (3) | US7141434B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1578931A4 (en) |
AU (1) | AU2003249218A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2004007680A2 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20160377465A1 (en) * | 2014-09-23 | 2016-12-29 | Micro Motion, Inc. | Magnetic flowmeter flowtube assembly with spring-energized seal rings |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8498249B2 (en) * | 2008-05-05 | 2013-07-30 | Mediatek Inc. | Method of network entry in OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems |
-
2002
- 2002-07-16 US US10/197,381 patent/US7141434B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2003
- 2003-07-15 WO PCT/US2003/021934 patent/WO2004007680A2/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2003-07-15 AU AU2003249218A patent/AU2003249218A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2003-07-15 EP EP03764608A patent/EP1578931A4/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2006
- 2006-10-18 US US11/550,731 patent/US20070054862A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2006-12-08 US US11/608,788 patent/US20080003620A1/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20160377465A1 (en) * | 2014-09-23 | 2016-12-29 | Micro Motion, Inc. | Magnetic flowmeter flowtube assembly with spring-energized seal rings |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2004007680A3 (en) | 2006-08-03 |
US20040014147A1 (en) | 2004-01-22 |
US20070054862A1 (en) | 2007-03-08 |
EP1578931A2 (en) | 2005-09-28 |
WO2004007680A2 (en) | 2004-01-22 |
AU2003249218A8 (en) | 2004-02-02 |
US7141434B2 (en) | 2006-11-28 |
AU2003249218A1 (en) | 2004-02-02 |
EP1578931A4 (en) | 2007-09-12 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20030166138A1 (en) | Cyclic peptides and analogs useful to treat allergies | |
Yurchenko et al. | CD147 is a signaling receptor for cyclophilin B | |
US20080039402A1 (en) | Peptides and Peptidomimetics Binding to Cd23 | |
US20070244033A1 (en) | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing a c-myc protein | |
US7422867B2 (en) | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor mediated IgE synthesis utilizing a CLLD8 protein | |
US20030096260A1 (en) | Compositions useful as ligands for the formyl peptide receptor like 1 receptor and methods of use thereof | |
US7598050B2 (en) | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing a chloride intracellular channel 1 protein | |
US20080003620A1 (en) | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate il-4 receptor-mediated ige synthesis utilizing an adenosine kinase | |
US7604951B2 (en) | Method for identifying compounds that modulate RXR associated processes with IgE production | |
US7425418B2 (en) | Compounds that modulate processes associated with IgE production | |
US7563585B2 (en) | Methods of assaying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing a thioredoxin-like 32 kDa protein (TXNL) | |
US7189523B2 (en) | Methods of identifying compounds that modulate IL-4 receptor-mediated IgE synthesis utilizing a B-cell associated protein | |
US20130323264A1 (en) | Diagnostic and therapeutic uses of moesin fragments | |
ES2368814T3 (en) | USEFUL COMPOSITIONS AS LINKS FOR THE RECEIVER TYPE RECEIVER 1 OF FORMILED PEPTIDES AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF. | |
JP2003523747A (en) | Peptides for detecting, diagnosing and treating diseases of the nervous system and nucleic acids encoding the peptides |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |